GMC Yukon Denali 2008 Owner's Manual

2008 GMC Yukon Denali/Yukon XL Denali Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-9
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-28
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-49
Airbag System
......................................... 1-75
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-92
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10
Windows ................................................. 2-19
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-21
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-25
Mirrors .................................................... 2-40
Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-44
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-47
Universal Home Remote System
................ 2-50
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-58
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-62
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-23
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-31
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-49
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-73
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-40
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-45
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-46
Front Axle
............................................... 5-47
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-48
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-53
Tires
...................................................... 5-55
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-98
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-107
Electrical System
.................................... 5-108
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-114
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-13
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-15
Index .................................................................1
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC, the
GMC Truck Emblem, and the names YUKON and
DENALI are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for GMC whenever it appears in this
manual.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
This manual describes features that may be available in
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.
For example, more than one entertainment system may
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15854807 A First Printing
ii
©
2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Using this Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. A
box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things
that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the
warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ....................1-4
Power Reclining Seatbacks ..............................1-6
Head Restraints .............................................1-8
Rear Seats .......................................................1-9
Heated Seats .................................................1-9
60/40 Split Bench Seat (Second Row) ...............1-9
Bucket Seats (Second Row) ...........................1-16
Third Row Seat ............................................1-23
Safety Belts ...................................................1-28
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-28
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-33
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-41
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-47
Lap Belt ......................................................1-47
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-48
Child Restraints .............................................1-49
Older Children ..............................................1-49
Infants and Young Children ............................1-52
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-56
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-58
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................1-60
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ............................................1-68
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ....................................1-71
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-71
Airbag System ...............................................1-75
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-78
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-81
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-83
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-83
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-84
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-85
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-90
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-90
Restraint System Check ..................................1-92
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-92
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-93
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
The power reclining seatback control is located behind
the power seat control on the outboard side of the
seats. See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-6.
Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat
settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-4.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
1-2
Power Lumbar
• To raise the height of the support, press and hold
the top of the control.
• To lower the height of the support, press and hold
the bottom of the control.
Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of support.
Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat
settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-4 for more
information.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as
it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
The controls used to operate the power lumbar feature
are located on the outboard side of the seats.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
rear of the control.
1-3
Heated Seats
The seats have the heated
seat feature, the buttons
used to control this feature
are located on the front
doors near the door
handle.
to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights above the
button will show the level of heat selected: three for
high, two for medium, and one for low.
The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the
ignition is turned off. If you want to use the heated
seat feature after you restart your vehicle, you will need
to press the appropriate heated seat or seatback
button again.
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
Your vehicle has the memory package.
I (Heated Seatback):
Press this button to turn on the
heated seatback.
The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
feature is working. Press the button to cycle through the
temperature settings of high, medium, and low and to turn
the heat to the seatback off. Indicator lights below the
button show the level of heat selected:
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to
turn on the heated seat and seatback.
The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
feature is working. Press the button to cycle through
the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and
1-4
The controls for this
feature are located on the
driver’s door panel, and
are used to program
and recall memory settings
for the driver’s seat,
outside mirrors, and the
adjustable throttle and
brake pedal feature if your
vehicle has it.
To save your positions in memory, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable
position.
See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 2-42
and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on
page 2-29 for more information.
Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and
recall the mirror positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you
know that the position has been stored.
A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brake pedal
position can be programmed by repeating the above
steps and pressing button 2.
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The
seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable throttle and brake
pedals will move to the position previously stored.
You will hear a single beep.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature
is on, automatic seat, mirror, and adjustable pedal
movement will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL”
under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 3-64 for more information.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power mirror buttons, or adjustable pedal
switch.
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position, the
driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall may
stop working. If this happens, press the appropriate
control for the area that is not recalling for two seconds,
after the obstruction is removed. Then try recalling
the memory position again by pressing the appropriate
memory button. If the memory position is still not
recalling, see your dealer for service.
1-5
Easy Exit Seat
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position can be
recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear
a single beep. The driver’s seat will move back.
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement will
occur when the key is removed from the ignition.
See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-64 for
more information.
Further programming for the memory seat feature can
be done using the DIC. You can select or not select the
following:
• The automatic easy exit seat feature
• The remote memory seat recall feature
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-64.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
The controls for the power reclining seatback are
located on the outboard side of the front seats behind
the power seat control.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
1-6
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat
settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat,
Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-4.
1-7
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press the
release button (A), located
on the top of the seatback,
while you push the head
restraint down.
The front seats may have head restraints that also tilt
forward and rearward.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-8
To tilt the head restraint, grasp the top of the restraint
while pressing the button (B), located on the inboard
side of the head restraint, and move it forward or
rearward until the desired locking position is reached.
Try to move the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The second row seats may have head rests that can be
adjusted up and down, but they do not tilt.
Rear Seats
Heated Seats
The rear seats have the
heated seat feature, the
buttons used to control this
feature are located on
the Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
panel.
A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display
to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to
cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium,
and low, and to turn it off. Indicator bars next to the
symbol will designate the level of heat selected: three for
high, two for medium, and one for low.
The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the
ignition is turned off. If the vehicle is restarted, the
heated seat button will need to be pressed again to
restart the feature.
60/40 Split Bench Seat
(Second Row)
Driver’s Side RSA
Heated Seat Button
Only shown
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seat(s) can
be folded for additional cargo space or folded and
tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats, if
your vehicle has them. These seats will have either
the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat
release fold and tumble feature.
M (Heated Seat):
To heat the seat cushion, press the
button with the heated seat symbol.
1-9
Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding a
rear seat.
The seatback will fold forward automatically.
Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat
load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front
seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the
upright position.
2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the
seat, to release the seatback.
1-10
3. Lift the same lever
again to release the
rear of the seat
from the floor. The seat
will tumble forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull
on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check to
be sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
3. Make sure the safety belt in the center seating
position is not caught between the two seats and is
not twisted.
1-11
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the
Third Row Seats
{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger
seating position. Push and pull on the seat to
make sure it is locked into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows, if your
vehicle has them, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-12
2. Lift the lever(s), located on the bottom rear of the
second row seat(s) on the inboard side, to release
the seatback. The seatback will fold forward.
3. Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the
seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward
automatically.
Automatic Release Fold and Tumble
Feature
2. From the front seats,
press one of the
automatic seat release
buttons located on
the overhead console.
The transmission must be in PARK (P) for this feature
to work.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
{CAUTION:
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat
when someone is sitting in the seat, could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
make sure there is no one sitting in the seat
before pressing the automatic seat release
button.
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Overhead Console
Buttons shown, Panel
Button similar
When accessing the third row seats, if your vehicle
has them, from the outside of the vehicle, press
the button on the panel behind either rear door.
One press of the button automatically folds
the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
There will be a slight delay between the folding of
the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-13
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position
{CAUTION:
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
1-14
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
3. Make sure that the safety belt in the center seating
position is not caught between the two seats and is
not twisted.
Folding and Tumbling the Second Row
Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or
Outside
2. Press the automatic
seat release button
located on the panel
behind the rear doors.
{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger
seating position. Push and pull on the seat to
make sure it is locked into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if
your vehicle has them, do the following:
Driver’s Side Rear Panel
Button shown
One press of the button automatically folds the
seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. There
will be a slight delay between the folding of the
seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-15
Bucket Seats (Second Row)
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks can be
reclined, the seats can be folded for additional cargo
space, or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to
the third row seats, if your vehicle has them. These
seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature
or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-16
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding a
rear seat.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the
seat, to release the seatback.
1-17
3. Lift the lever again to
release the rear of the
seat from the floor.
The seat will tumble
forward.
The seatback will fold forward. Leaving the seatback
in this position creates a flat load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front
seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the
upright position.
1-18
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the
Third Row Seats
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger
seating position. Push and pull on the seat to
make sure it is locked into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if
your vehicle has them, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-19
2. Lift the lever, located
on the bottom rear of
the second row seat on
the inboard side, to
release the seatback.
The seatback will
fold forward.
Automatic Release Fold and Tumble
Feature
The transmission must be in PARK (P) for this feature
to work.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
{CAUTION:
3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat
from the floor. The seat will tumble forward.
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat
when someone is sitting in the seat, could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
make sure there is no one sitting in the seat
before pressing the automatic seat release
button.
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-20
2. From the front seats,
press one of the
automatic seat release
buttons located on
the overhead console.
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
{CAUTION:
Overhead Console
Buttons shown
When accessing the third row seats, if your vehicle
has them, from the outside of the vehicle, press
the button on the panel behind either rear door.
One press of the button automatically folds
the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
There will be a slight delay between the folding of
the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
1-21
Folding and Tumbling the Second Row
Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or
Outside
2. Press the automatic
seat release button
located on the panel
behind the rear doors.
{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger
seating position. Push and pull on the seat to
make sure it is locked into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if
your vehicle has them, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-22
Driver’s Side Rear Panel
Button shown
One press of the button automatically folds the
seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. There
will be a slight delay between the folding of the
seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
Third Row Seat
If the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s) can
be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled, or
removed from the vehicle.
Folding the Seatback(s)
3. Lift the release lever,
located on the bottom
rear of the seatback
on the outboard side of
the seat, and the
seatback will fold forward.
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
2. Remove all items on the seat cushion.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-23
Unfolding the Seatback(s)
Tumbling the Third Row Seat
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
The seat can be tumbled forward for additional cargo
space.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
2. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the
upright position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-24
To tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
2. Make sure the head rests are completely lowered,
there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat,
and all items are removed from the cupholder
and storage bin, if the seat is a two-passenger seat.
3. Fold the seatbacks forward using the instructions
previously listed under “Folding the Seatbacks”.
You will not be able to unlatch the seat from
the floor unless the seatback is folded down.
4. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by lifting the
lever located next
to the carrying handle
on the rear of the
seat near the bottom.
3. Release the seat from the tumbled position by lifting
the lever located next to the carrying handle at the
bottom rear of the seat.
4. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright
position.
{CAUTION:
5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.
6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place.
7. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked.
Put the seat in this position only when necessary for
additional cargo space.
Returning the Third Row Seat from a
Tumbled Position
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the
following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
2. Make sure there is nothing that could become
trapped under the seat.
1-25
Removing the Third Row Seat
Installing the Third Row Seat
To remove the seat, do the following:
To install the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatbacks” previously.
The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback is
folded.
2. Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the
track on the floor and roll the seat forward. The front
latches should lock into place. If the latches do
not lock, try tilting the rear of the seat upward
slightly.
3. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling the
carrying handle,
located at the rear of
the seat, rearward.
3. Lower the rear of the seat and push down on the
seat to engage the rear floor latches.
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle. There is a track in
the floor to guide the seat wheels out of the vehicle.
1-26
4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright
position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
7. Make sure the safety belts are returned to the
original position over the seatbacks.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-27
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
1-28
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-33.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or
killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-29
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-30
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-31
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-32
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-49
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-52. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-33
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-34
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-35
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-36
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-37
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-38
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-39
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-40
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a lap-shoulder
except for the center front passenger position, if your
vehicle has one, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on
page 1-47 for more information.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-85.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If
you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-48.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
1-41
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
1-42
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if
the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety
belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move it down, squeeze
the buttons (A) on the sides
of the height adjuster and
move the height adjuster to
the desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-93.
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to make
sure it has locked into position.
1-43
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the second row seat and the third row, if your vehicle
has one. Here is how to install a comfort guide to the
safety belt:
Third Row
If your vehicle has a third row, remove the guide
from its storage pocket on the side of the seat.
Second Row
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the interior body.
1-44
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-45
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Slide the guide into its storage clip on the
interior body or storage pocket on the side of the seat.
1-46
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-41.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
You vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
1-47
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-48.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the
buckle.
1-48
Child Restraints
Older Children
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 1-41 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-49
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-41.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-50
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
1-51
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and
never allow children to play with the safety
belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
child restraint.
1-52
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-53
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-54
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-55
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
1-56
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-60 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
1-57
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Where to Put the Restraint
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
1-58
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the
frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a
child restraint in the center front seat. It is
always better to secure a child restraint in a
rear seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-85
for additional information.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
1-59
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Lower Anchors
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
attached using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-60
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for
use with or without the top tether being attached. Others
require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-61
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Third Row — Two
Passenger
Second Row — 60/40
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Second Row — Bucket
1-62
Third Row — Three
Passenger
For models with a three passenger third row seat, see
the information following for installing a child restraint
with a top tether in the third row, if your vehicle has one.
Never install two top tethers using the same top
tether anchor.
For models with 60/40 second row seating, the rear
right side passenger and center seating positions have
exposed metal anchors located in the crease between
the seatback and the seat cushion.
For models with second row bucket seats, both rear
seating positions have exposed metal anchors located
in the crease between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
Second Row Seat — Bucket
For models with bucket second row seating, the top
tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat
cushion for each seating position in the second row.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
1-63
Second Row Seat — 60/40
For models with 60/40 second row seating, the top
tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat
cushion for each seating position in the second row.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
1-64
Third Row Seat — Two or Three Passenger
For vehicles with a two passenger third row seat, there
is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear
of the seat cushion that can be used for the rear driver
side seating position in the third row. Never install
two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat, there
is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of
the seat cushion that can be used for either the third row
center or driver side seating position. Never install
two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-58 for additional
information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
1-65
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
1-66
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has
one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-67
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-60 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-60 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
1-68
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-58.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-69
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-60 for more
information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions
to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
1-70
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-58.
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the
frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a
child restraint in the center front seat. It is
always better to secure a child restraint in a
rear seat.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-85 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-35 for
more information on this, including important safety
information.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
1-71
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
CAUTION:
1-72
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-85 for additional information.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-60 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-60 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the
vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-35.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-73
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-74
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
• If your vehicle has a third row seat, it will have third
row roof-rail airbags.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
1-75
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
1-76
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle, during a
vehicle rollover, or in a severe frontal impact.
They are not designed to inflate in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 1-49 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-52.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.
1-77
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-34
for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-78
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-79
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags and a third row
passenger seat, the airbags are located in the ceiling
above the rear windows for the outboard passenger
positions in the third row.
1-80
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
1-81
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat. The seat position sensor provides information
that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at
a reduced level or at full deployment.
Your vehicle has roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
on page 1-75. Roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover
or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
1-82
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear
impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either
side of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing system
predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
a severe frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first, second, and third
rows, if equipped with a third row seat. The rollover
capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the
risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although
no system can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 1-81 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-83
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-83.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical
attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
1-84
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead
console when you start your vehicle.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-15 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-16.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-35.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
1-85
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-86
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-35.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-71.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline the
vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
the head restraint. See Head Restraints on page 1-8.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer.
1-87
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional
material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions,
seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask
the person to place the seatback in the fully upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
1-88
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. This may unintentionally cause the passenger
sensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for some
adult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-34 for more on this, including
important safety information.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-90 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-89
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-14.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-90
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, rollover sensor
module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or
trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing
pad or device, installed under or on top of the
seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-85.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-72
for additional important information.
1-91
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-34 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-33 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-101.
1-92
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-83. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-34.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-93
✍ NOTES
1-94
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-8
Doors and Locks ............................................2-10
Door Locks ..................................................2-10
Power Door Locks ........................................2-11
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-11
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks ...............................................2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................2-13
Power Liftgate ..............................................2-15
Power Running Boards ..................................2-18
Windows ........................................................2-19
Power Windows ............................................2-20
Sun Visors ...................................................2-21
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-21
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-22
PASS-Key® III+ ............................................2-23
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ..............................2-24
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-25
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-25
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-26
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-27
Starting the Engine .......................................2-27
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-29
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-29
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-30
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-34
Parking Brake ..............................................2-35
Shifting Into PARK (P) ...................................2-36
Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-37
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-38
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-38
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-39
Mirrors ...........................................................2-40
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ....................................................2-40
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .....................2-42
Object Detection Systems ...............................2-44
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............2-44
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
OnStar® System .............................................2-47
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-50
Universal Home Remote System .....................2-50
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) ............................2-51
Storage Areas ................................................2-58
Glove Box ...................................................2-58
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-58
2-2
Instrument Panel Storage ...............................2-59
Center Console Storage .................................2-59
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-59
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-60
Convenience Net ..........................................2-60
Cargo Cover ................................................2-61
Sunroof .........................................................2-62
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all door locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
2-3
See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or
additional key is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, call the Roadside
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-6.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m) away with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can also
start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter, with the remote start button, provides
an increased operating range of 195 feet (60 m) away.
However, the operating range may be less while the
vehicle is running. As a result, you may need to
be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were
to start it.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4.
With Remote Start and
Liftglass (Without
Remote Start Similar)
With Remote Start and
Power Liftgate and
Liftglass (Without
Remote Start Similar)
The following functions may be available if your vehicle
has the RKE system:
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
feature, press / to start the engine from outside
the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 2-8 for additional information.
2-5
Q
(Lock): Press
Q to lock all the doors.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the turn signal lamps will flash once to indicate
locking has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the
horn will chirp when the lock button is pressed
again within three seconds of the previous press of the
lock button. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 3-64 for additional information.
Pressing Q will arm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-22.
" (Unlock): Press " to unlock the driver’s door. If
pressed again within three seconds, all remaining
doors will unlock.
" is
If it is dark enough outside, your interior lamps will
come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition
is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the turn
signal lamps will flash twice to indicate unlocking has
occurred. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 3-64. If enabled through the DIC,
the exterior lights will turn on briefly if it is dark
enough outside. See “APPROACH LIGHTING” under
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 3-64.
2-6
Pressing " on the RKE transmitter will disarm the
content theft-deterrent system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-22.
m (Liftglass): For vehicles with a liftglass, press and
m to open the liftglass.
hold
& (Power Liftgate):
For vehicles with a power
liftgate, press and hold & to open and close
the liftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime will
sound to indicate when the liftgate is opening and
closing.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release L to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps
will flash and the horn will sound three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash
and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved
to ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be
re-coded to match the new transmitter. The lost
transmitter will no longer work after the new transmitters
are re-coded. The vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it. See “Relearn Remote
Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (Using DIC
Buttons) on page 3-49 or DIC Operation and Displays
(Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem) on page 3-54
for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to
your vehicle.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for additional
information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-7
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the
vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating or
air conditioning systems and rear window defogger.
Normal operation of the system will return after the key
is turned to the ON/RUN position.
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system,
the climate control system will default to a heating or
cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. If
your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle
was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic
climate control system and heated seats, the heated
seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and
will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. If
your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, during remote start, you will need to manually
turn the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
on page 1-4 for additional information.
2-8
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using the remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,
provides an increased range of operation. However, the
range may be less while the vehicle is running. As a
result, you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn
it off, than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4 for additional
information.
/
(Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button. The
vehicle’s doors will lock. Immediately press and
hold the transmitter’s remote start button until the
turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see the
vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remote start
button for two to four seconds. Pressing the remote
start button again after the vehicle has started
will turn the engine off.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The vehicle can be remote started two separate times
between driving sequences. The engine will run for
10 minutes after each remote start.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
The additional ten minutes are considered a second
remote vehicle start.
Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with
one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be
started with the key.
After the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle
can be remote started again.
2-9
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the
ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an
emission control system malfunction and the check
engine light comes on.
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil
pressure gets low.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle
start system enabled. The system may be enabled or
disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 3-64 for additional information. If your vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to
enable or disable the remote vehicle start system.″
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature, the
RKE transmitter will have an extended range that allows
locking or unlocking of the vehicle from approximately
197 feet (60 m) away.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
2-10
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key in the driver’s door.
From the inside, use the power door locks or manual
door locks. To lock or unlock the door with the manual
locks, push down or pull up on the manual lock knob.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
front doors.
K
Q
(Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
(Lock): Press to lock the doors.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch
and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear
three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK
under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 3-64.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable
you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 3-64 for more information on DIC
programming.
2-11
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock,
using the power door lock switch, or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle
has one.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
Security Lock Label
shown
The rear doors must be open to access them. The
label showing lock and unlock positions is located near
the lock.
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
2-12
This feature protects you from locking the key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door
is open.
If the driver’s side power door lock switch is pressed
when the driver’s door is open and the key is in
the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver’s
door will unlock.
If the passenger’s side power door lock switch is
pressed when the front passenger’s door is open and
the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the front passenger’s door will unlock.
Liftgate/Liftglass
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• If you have air outlets on or under the
{CAUTION:
instrument panel, open them all the way.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass or
liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate
open, or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftglass or liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on
page 3-23.
CAUTION:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a power
liftgate, disable the power liftgate function.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-38.
See Power Liftgate on page 2-15 for more information
on how to use the power liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or
press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter twice. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
(Continued)
2-13
To open the entire liftgate, press the power liftgate
release button on the RKE or in the vehicle. See Power
Liftgate on page 2-15. You can also press the
touchpad on the underside of the liftgate handle (B).
The liftgate will open after a slight delay. The vehicle
must be in PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close the
liftgate, use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid.
The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the rear
wipers are in motion. Attempting to open the liftgate or
liftglass while the rear wipers are in motion will cause
the release of the liftglass or liftgate to delay until
the wipers are parked off the liftglass.
On vehicles with a liftglass, press the button on the
underside of the license pocket applique (A) to open it.
The liftglass can also be opened by pressing the
liftglass release button on the RKE.
2-14
Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage,
the liftglass and liftgate will not open. The liftglass and
liftgate will resume operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.
If the battery is properly connected and has adequate
voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass still will not function,
your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for service.
Power Liftgate
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Power Liftgate Operation
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
{CAUTION:
• If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable
the power liftgate function.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate open, or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See Climate
Control System in the index.
CAUTION:
See Power Liftgate on page 2-15.
On vehicles with a power liftgate the button is located
on the center console.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to use the power
liftgate feature.
&:
Press the top of the button to open or close the
power liftgate.
OFF: Press the bottom of the button for manual
operation of the power liftgate.
(Continued)
2-15
The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the
power liftgate is moving.
The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in
the following ways:
• Press and hold the power liftgate button on the
{CAUTION:
You or others could be injured if caught in the
path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is
no one in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for
overhead obstructions such as a garage door,
you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the area above and
behind the liftgate is clear before opening it.
2-16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until
the liftgate starts moving. Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more
information.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the center console.
• Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside liftgate
handle.
Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch a second time
while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction.
l:
The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the
power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch.
Press the button a second time during liftgate operation
to reverse that operation.
The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under
extreme temperatures, or under low battery conditions.
If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated
manually.
If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while the
power function is in progress, the liftgate power function
will continue to completion. If you shift the transmission
out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power
liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the
open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always
make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched
before you drive away.
If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support
struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a
chime will sound. The liftgate will stay open temporarily,
then slowly close. See your dealer/retailer for service
before using the liftgate.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power
open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the
liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full
closed or open position. After removing the obstruction,
the power liftgate operation can be used again. If the
liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power
cycle, the power function will deactivate, and you
must manually open or close the liftgate. The REAR
ACCESS OPEN warning message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is
open. After removing the obstructions, manually
open the liftgate to the full open position or close the
liftgate to the fully closed and latched position. The
liftgate will now resume normal power operation.
Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side
edges of the liftgate. If an object is caught between the
liftgate and the body and presses against this sensor,
the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully.
The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or
closed manually. Do not force the liftgate open or
closed during a power cycle.
2-17
Manual Operation of Power Liftgate
Power Running Boards
To change the liftgate to manual operation, press the
switch on the center console to the OFF position.
Your vehicle may have power running boards.
With the power liftgate disabled and all of the doors
unlocked, the liftgate can be manually opened and
closed.
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle
on the outside of the liftgate, and lift the gate open.
To close the liftgate, use the pull cup to lower the liftgate
and close. The liftgate latch will power close. Always
close the liftgate before driving.
If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate
is pressed while power operation is disabled, the lights
will flash three times, but the liftgate will not move.
The power running boards automatically extend from
beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door
has been opened. Once the door is closed, the running
boards will automatically move back under the vehicle
after a brief delay. The vehicle must not be moving
for the running boards to extend or retract.
The switch used to disable
the power running boards
is located on the center
console below the climate
control system.
It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate
open, however, if you must drive with the liftgate open,
the liftgate should be set to manual operation by
pressing the OFF switch on the center console.
The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is
disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery
is reconnected and charged.
If the battery is properly connected with adequate
voltage, the switch is not disabled, and the liftgate still
will not function, your vehicle should be taken to a
dealer/retailer for service.
2-18
The running boards cannot be disabled in the extended
position.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-19
Power Windows
The power window
controls are located on
each of the side doors.
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with
children.
When there are children in the rear seat use
the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
2-20
Driver’s Side shown
The driver’s door also has switches that control the
passenger and rear windows. The power windows work
when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY
or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 2-27.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the
window.
Express-Down Windows
Sun Visors
Windows with an express-down feature allow the
windows to be lowered without holding the switch. Press
down fully on the window switch, then release, to
activate the express-down mode. The express-down
mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the
front edge of the switch.
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun
visor from the center mount and slide it along the
rod from side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger
side of the front window. Swing the sun visor to the side
to cover the side window. It can be moved along the
rod from side-to-side in this position also.
Window Lockout
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
o
Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the
driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pull the sun
visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on.
(Window Lockout): The window lockout switch is
located with the power window switches on the
driver’s door armrest. This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating, except from
the driver’s position. Press the switch to turn the lockout
feature on or off. An indicator light will come on to
show the lockout feature is on.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
2-21
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.
This is the security light.
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the power door lock switch. The
security light will come on to inform the driver the
system is arming. If a door is open when the doors
are locked, the security light will flash.
If the delayed locking feature is turned on, the
theft-deterrent system will not start the arming
process until the last door is closed and the delay
timer has expired. See Delayed Locking on
page 2-11.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
2-22
If a locked door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn
will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not
placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door
is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm,
the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash
and the horn will sound for about two minutes, then
will turn off to save the battery power.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door lock.
It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with
the door open or the RKE transmitter. You should also
remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct
ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm if it is armed.
If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the
RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and
turn it to START to turn off the alarm. The alarm will not
stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
PASS-Key® III+
To test the alarm:
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the RKE transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch will
not work.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-108.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-23
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
2-24
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-108. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for programming additional keys
only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or
do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has a
1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-42 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-25
Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn the
ignition switch to four
different positions.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. The key can
only be removed when the ignition is turned to
LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like
the radio and the windshield wipers operate while
the engine is off.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
2-26
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the
ACC/ACCESSORY ignition position and the ON/RUN
position may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle
from starting. Do not operate your vehicle in the
ACC/ACCESSORY ignition position for a long period
of time.
C (ON/RUN): This is the position for driving. It is the
position the ignition switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the key is released.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the
key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always
remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
•
•
•
•
Audio System
Power Windows
OnStar® System (if equipped)
Sunroof (if equipped)
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof
continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door
is opened. The radio continues to work for up to
10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – this is a
safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2-27
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the ignition key
is turned to the START position, and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in START for many
seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. Engine cranking
can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-28
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up
and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
On vehicles with this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals.
This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since the
pedals cannot move farther away from the standard
position, but can move toward the driver for better pedal
reach.
No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the
vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or while using the cruise
control.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the instrument panel below
the climate control
system.
Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the
pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of
the switch to move the pedals away from your body.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to
confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
make only small adjustments.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which lets
pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat,
Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-4 for more information.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the power steering
fluid reservoir.
2-29
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
2-30
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle has a Hydra-Matic® 6L80 automatic
transmission, and has an electronic shift position
indicator within the instrument panel cluster. The
electronic shift position indicator displays when the shift
lever is moved out of PARK (P).
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
When parked on a hill, especially when the vehicle has
a heavy load, you may notice an increase in the
effort to shift out of Park. See Torque Lock (Automatic
Transmission) under Shifting Into PARK (P) on
page 2-36 for more information.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P) on
page 2-36. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-42.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 4-32.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-31
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under
Loss of Control on page 4-12
When temperatures are very cold, the Hydra-Matic®
Automatic Transmission’s gear shifting may be delayed
providing more stable shifts until the engine warms
up. Shifts may be more noticeable with a cold
transmission. This difference in shifting is normal.
MANUAL MODE (M): This position lets drivers select
the range of gears appropriate for current driving
conditions. See Range Selection Mode later in
this section.
2-32
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Your vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts
the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions
in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift
stabilization feature is designed to determine, before
making an upshift, if the engine will be able to maintain
vehicle speed by analyzing things such as throttle
position, vehicle load, and hill grade. If the shift
stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle
speed cannot be maintained, the transmission does not
upshift and instead holds the current gear. In some
cases, this may appear to be a delayed shift, however the
transmission is operating normally.
Your vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shift controls.
Adaptive shift controls continually compares key shift
parameters to pre programmed ideal shift conditions
stored in the transmissions computer. The transmission
constantly makes adjustments to improve vehicle
performance according to the way the vehicle is being
used, such as with a heavy load. During this adaptive
shift controls process, some shifts may feel different as
the transmission determines the best settings for a
particular shift.
Range Selection Mode
When in the MANUAL MODE (M) a number displays next
to the M, indicating the current gear that has been
selected. The number displayed in the gear indicator is
the highest gear that can be used. However, your vehicle
can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to
driving conditions. This means that all gears below that
number are available. When FIFTH (5) is selected,
FIRST (1) through FIFTH (5) gears are automatically
shifted by the vehicle, but SIXTH (6) cannot be used until
the plus/minus button located on the steering column
lever is used to change to the gear.
The Range Selection Mode controls the vehicle and
engine speed while driving down a hill or towing a trailer,
by allowing you to select a desired range of gears.
Grade Braking is not available when the Range
Selection Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on
page 2-34 for more information.
On vehicles with a Range Selection Mode. The Range
Selection Mode controls the vehicle’s transmission.
While using the Range Selection Mode, Cruise Control
and the Tow/Haul mode can be used.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever to the MANUAL MODE (M).
2. Press the plus/minus button, to upshift or downshift
selecting the desired range of gears for your current
driving conditions.
2-33
Tow/Haul Mode
Press the button located on the end of the shift lever to
turn the tow/haul on or off. When the tow/haul is on,
a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 3-47 for more
information.
Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under Towing a Trailer on
page 4-42 for more information.
The tow/haul mode works with the Autoride® feature, if
the vehicle has this, to enhance the ride when trailering or
with a loaded vehicle. See Autoride® on page 4-41.
Grade Braking
Your vehicle has a tow/haul mode. The tow/haul mode
adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift
cycling, providing increased performance, vehicle
control, and transmission cooling when towing or hauling
heavy loads.
2-34
Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade.
It maintains the vehicle’s speed by automatically
implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and
the transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces
wear on the brakes system and increases control of the
vehicle. The system constantly monitors the vehicle’s
speed, acceleration, throttle position, and whether
the brake pedal is being pressed, and determines when
to keep the current vehicle speed or to slow down.
The system will then automatically command downshifts
that reduces the vehicles speed, until the brake pedal
is no longer being pressed. This indicates the desired
vehicle speed has been reached.
The tow/haul mode and grade braking shift modes can be
activated by pressing the button on the end of the shift
control stalk. While in the DSC mode, grade braking is
deactivated, allowing the driver to select a gear.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-30 for
more information.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at
least 5 mph (8 km/h).
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever, with
the parking brake symbol and located above the
parking brake pedal.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-42.
2-35
Shifting Into PARK (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-42.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position by
pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up
as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-36
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set. After the shift lever is moved
into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from
PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not fully locked into
PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle can put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. It might be difficult to pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)
properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out
how, see Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-36.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before releasing the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you might need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission. Then
you should be able to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-40 for more
information.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P).
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have your
vehicle serviced soon.
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is
applied.
2-37
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-38
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-38.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-29.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-36.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-42.
2-39
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
When on, an automatic dimming mirror automatically
dims to the proper level to minimize glare from
lights behind you after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and
the outside temperature will both appear in the display
at the same time.
P
(On/Off): This is the on/off button.
Temperature and Compass Display
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the compass/temperature display on or off.
If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibrate the
compass. For more information on calibration, see
below.
2-40
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please consult your dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on
automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to the left
of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press and hold the
on/off button for approximately six seconds until the
green light comes on, indicating that the mirror is in
automatic dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds, until the green indicator
light turns off.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside of
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is
the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, your compass could give false
readings.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appear in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
2-41
Compass Calibration
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
The outside power
foldaway mirror controls
are located on the driver’s
door armrest.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then
press the arrows located on the four-way control
pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again to deselect
the mirror.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
• Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position.
2-42
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See
“Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
them one time using the mirror controls. This will reset
them to their normal position.
This mirror has the following features.
Automatic Dimming
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the
headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display on page 2-40.
Curb View Assist
If your vehicle has the memory package, the outside
mirrors are able to perform the park tilt function. This
feature may be useful in allowing the driver to view the
curb when parallel parking. This feature will cause the
passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected
position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R).
The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will return to its
original position when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), or the ignition is turned off or to
OFF/LOCK.
This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-64.
Heated Mirrors
The button to turn the heated mirrors on or off is located
on the climate control panel. Press this button to
warm the driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview
mirrors to help clear them of ice, snow, and
condensation.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-23 for more
information.
2-43
Convex Mirror
Object Detection Systems
{CAUTION:
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it helps you park easier and avoid other
vehicles while in REVERSE (R). It operates at speeds
less than 5 mph (8 km/h). It can determine how close
objects are to the rear bumper, up to 8 feet (2.5 m)
behind your vehicle. The distance sensors are located
on the rear bumper.
The passenger’s side mirror may have convex glass.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can
be seen from the driver’s seat.
Your vehicle has a turn signal indicator on the mirror.
An arrow on the mirror will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
2-44
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
It cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are
too close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death
could occur. Even with URPA, always check
behind your vehicle before backing up. While
backing, be sure to look for objects and check
your vehicle’s mirrors.
On some vehicles this
display is located near the
passenger side rear
window and can be seen
by looking over your
right shoulder.
If your vehicle has the display, there are three
color-coded lights to provide distance and system
information.
If your vehicle does not have the display and it has
URPA, you will hear the beeps as described in the
following information.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R). The rear display will
then briefly illuminate to let you know the system is
working.
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
If you are above this speed, the red light on the rear
display will flash.
2-45
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below liftgate level. Objects
must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from your rear
bumper. This distance may be less during warmer or
humid weather.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur for three seconds when
you are closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as you get closer to a detected object:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and beep for
three seconds
English
8 ft
40 in
23 in
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
0.6 m
1 ft
0.3 m
The system can be
disabled by pressing the
rear park aid disable button
located next to the radio.
The indicator light will
come on to indicate that
URPA is off.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
• The driver disables the system.
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep your
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-102.
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle
or an object was hanging out of your liftgate/liftglass
during your last drive cycle, the red light may
illuminate in the rear display. Once the attached
object is removed, URPA will return to normal
operation.
2-46
• A tow bar is attached to your vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
OnStar® System
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar
service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar
Subscriber glove box literature. For more information,
visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speak
with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
2-47
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions
& Connections Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
2-48
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary
minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an
OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
continental U.S.).
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call
Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the accident that your
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-117 for
more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
2-49
Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
this means that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
Universal Home Remote
System
Universal Home Remote System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-50
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. You only need the original remote control
transmitter for Fixed Code programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of
the vehicle, the programmed buttons should be
erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to park
outside of the garage. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or security device
you are programming.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the
device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
2-51
To program up to three devices:
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete the following steps.
2-52
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above the
selected button, should slowly blink. You may
need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
5. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what you used for the garage door opener.
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
go to www.learcar2u.com.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the
device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
If these instructions do not work, you probably have a
Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
2-53
To program up to three devices:
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door
opener, remove the battery cover on your hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener motor. If you see a row
of dip switches similar to the graphic above, you
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. If you
do not see a row of dip switches, return to
the previous section for Programming Universal
Home Remote – Rolling Code.
2-54
Your hand held transmitter may have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
may also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program your Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
you do not have the original hand held transmitter.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as
they do in the examples, but they should be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter
may be labeled as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be labeled as
“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position may be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-55
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in Step
2 will now become the button strokes you
enter into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4.
Be sure to enter the switch settings that you
wrote down in Step 2, in order from left to right,
into the Universal Home Remote, when
completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home Remote
for each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-56
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
6. Press and hold the button you would like to use to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. You may need to hold the
button from five to 55 seconds.
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating
the instructions.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
You should erase the programmed buttons when you
sell or terminate your lease.
8. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what you used for
the garage door opener.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same
time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-5.
2-57
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lock and
unlock.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have cupholders located in the front
and rear of the floor console or in the fold down armrest.
You may also have cupholders in the second and
third row seat armrest areas.
To use the front cupholder, press down on the access
door latch button and release. The door will open.
To close, push it back down. The front cupholder liner
can be removed for cleaning by squeezing the top
center of it and pulling it out from under the chrome ring.
2-58
To access the cupholders in the rear floor console,
pull downward on the lid.
Instrument Panel Storage
Luggage Carrier
Your vehicle may have a closed storage area on the
instrument panel above the compact disc changer. You
can open the storage area by pressing in the bottom
of the lid and the lid will automatically raise up.
Press down on the lid to close the storage area.
You can load things on top of your vehicle with this
feature.
Center Console Storage
Your vehicle has a console compartment between the
bucket seats.
To open it, press the button on the front of the console
and swing the console cover open.
The console may be equipped with an accessory power
outlet inside. See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on
page 3-21.
The rear of the console also has a cupholder that
swings down for the rear seat passengers to use.
The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached to
the roof and crossrails which can be moved back
and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the
siderails or siderail supports.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-34.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage and
cargo are still securely fastened.
2-59
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, place
the load in the area over the rear wheels (behind
the rear side door on Yukon XL Denali models).
If you need to, cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit
inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the
load. If plywood is used, tie it to the siderail
supports.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding.
To move the crossrails, pull out on the latch release
handle at each end. Slide the crossrail to the desired
position balancing the force side to side. Push the
release handle back into the latched position and
slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure
the latch snaps securely into place.
• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. Also
tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so
tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
• For the purpose of wind noise reduction, locate the
front crossrail approximately 18 to 24 inches
(46 to 58 cm) rearward of the front supports.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely locked
into the siderail.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the rear glass. If items
are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care should be
taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
Rear Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located
in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the driver’s
side trim panel.
To open the utility compartment, turn the knobs and
swing the compartment door open. The compartment
door can be removed.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of
the vehicle. Store small loads as far forward as possible.
The net should not be used to store heavy loads.
2-60
Cargo Cover
To remove the cover, from a regular wheelbase model,
do the following:
1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you put
it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
To use the cover, do the following:
1. Pull the cover handle toward the rear of the vehicle.
2. Latch the cover posts into the retaining sockets
on the cargo area trim panels.
To return the cover to the retracted position, do the
following:
1. Pull up on the cover handle to release the cover
posts from the retaining sockets.
2. Let the cover move forward to the full retracted
position.
2. Then, grasping the driver’s side cover end cap,
push the cover end cap toward the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
3. Swing the cover rearward and take it out of the
vehicle.
To put the cover in the vehicle, do the following:
1. Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces
rearward with the round surface facing down.
2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and place the
cover end cap into the slot in the passenger’s
side trim panel.
3. Move the other end of the cover forward and hold it
next to the driver’s side trim panel slot.
4. Press the end caps in, this will allow the cover to fit
into the trim slot.
5. Lightly pull on the cover holder to make sure it is
secure.
On the extended wheelbase models there are two
cover positions. The slots furthest forward allow
the cover to be used if the third seat is removed or
folded down. The cover can be installed and
removed from either side.
2-61
Cargo Tie Downs
Your vehicle may have cargo tie downs in the rear
cargo area that allow you to strap cargo in and keep it
from moving inside the vehicle.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition needs
to be turned to ON, or Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) must be active. When RAP is active, the sunroof
will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned
off, or until a front door is opened. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-27 for more
information.
There are two switches in
the overhead console that
operate the sunroof.
2-62
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof
press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch until
the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close
the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver’s side
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof,
but can also be opened manually.
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From
the comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s
side switch a second time to open the sunroof to
the full-open position.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the
sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the
driver’s side switch. The sunroof will open automatically.
To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a
second time. To express-close the sunroof, fully press
and release the front of the driver’s side switch. The
sunroof will close automatically. To stop the sunroof
partway, press the switch a second time. The sunshade
will open automatically with the sunroof, but can also
be opened manually.
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From
the comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s
side switch a second time to open the sunroof to
the full-open position.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Vent: The sunroof has an express-vent open feature.
From the closed position, press the rear of the
passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof. To stop the
sunroof partway, press the switch a second time. To
close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the
passenger’s side switch. To stop the sunroof partway,
release the switch.
Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will
detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at
the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will then
open halfway, and the air deflector will raise. To close
the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the
“Express-Close” or “Manual-Close” functions described
previously. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and
there is an object in the path of the sunroof when
it closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
and stop the sunroof. To close the sunroof once it has
re-opened, refer to the “Manual-Close” or
“Express-Close” functions described previously.
2-63
✍ NOTES
2-64
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Heated Steering Wheel ...................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-8
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ........................................3-10
Rainsense™ II Wipers ...................................3-10
Windshield Washer .......................................3-11
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-12
Cruise Control ..............................................3-13
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-16
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-17
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-17
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-18
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-19
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-19
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-19
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-20
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-20
Exit Lighting .................................................3-20
Front Reading Lamps ....................................3-20
Electric Power Management ...........................3-20
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-21
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-21
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-22
Climate Controls ............................................3-23
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-23
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-29
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
and Electronic Climate Controls ...................3-29
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-31
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-32
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-33
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-33
Tachometer .................................................3-33
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-33
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-34
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-35
Charging System Light ..................................3-37
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-38
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-39
Antilock Brake System Warning Light ...............3-40
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..............................3-40
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-41
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-41
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-42
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-45
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-46
Security Light ...............................................3-46
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-47
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-47
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-47
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-47
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-48
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-48
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-49
DIC Operation and Displays
(Using DIC Buttons) ...................................3-49
DIC Operation and Displays
(Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem) ..............3-54
3-2
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-56
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) ....3-64
Audio System(s) .............................................3-73
Setting the Clock ..........................................3-74
Radio(s) (MP3) .............................................3-76
Using an MP3 (Radio with Six-Disc Player) ......3-94
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and DVD
Player) .....................................................3-99
XM Radio Messages ...................................3-104
Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-105
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System .........3-105
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-115
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-116
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-117
Radio Reception .........................................3-118
Rear Side Window Antenna ..........................3-119
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-119
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
United States version shown; Canada Similar
3-4
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-29.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-32.
D. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-30.
E. Tow/Haul Selector Button. See Tow/Haul Mode on
page 2-34.
F. Driver Information Center Controls. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-49.
G. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-73.
H. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-16.
I. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp
Override on page 3-20. Instrument Panel Brightness
Control. See Instrument Panel Brightness on
page 3-19. Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on
page 3-19.
J. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control on
page 3-13. Heated Steering Wheel Button (If
Equipped). See Heated Steering Wheel on page 3-7.
K. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-7.
L. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
M. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-117.
N. Dual Automatic Climate Controls. See Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-23.
O. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-21. Cigarette Lighter (If
Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-22.
P. StabiliTrak® Button. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-6. Rear Park Aid Disable Button. See
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on
page 2-44.
Q. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-58.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They also let
police know you have a problem.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
top of the steering
column.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
ignition position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your vehicle’s
turn signals will not work.
3-6
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
Tilt Wheel
Heated Steering Wheel
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel, that lets you adjust the
steering wheel before driving. Raising it to the highest
level gives more room to exit and enter your vehicle.
Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The button with this
symbol is located on the
left side of the steering
wheel.
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel on or
off. A light on the button will display when the feature
is turned on.
The steering wheel will take about three minutes to start
heating.
The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the lower left
side of the column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
L (Windshield Washer):
See Windshield Washer on
page 3-11.
5 (Rear Wiper Delay):
See Rear Window
Wiper/Washer on page 3-12.
Z (Rear Wiper): See Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
page 3-12.
= (Rear Wiper Wash):
See Rear Window
Wiper/Washer on page 3-12.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G (Turn and Lane Change Signals):
See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
53 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer): See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.
Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-9.
N (Windshield Wipers):
page 3-10.
3-8
See Windshield Wipers on
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever for less
than one second until the arrow starts to flash. This will
cause the turn signals to automatically flash three times.
It will flash six times if tow-haul mode is active. Holding
the turn signal lever for more than one second will cause
the turn signals to flash until you release the lever. The
lever will return by itself when it is released.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53
(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the
lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers will not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a
blown fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-108.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the Driver Information Control (DIC).
To turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal
lever to the off position.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
3-9
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on. They
will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster
will come on. Release the lever to return to normal
operation.
8 (Mist):
Windshield Wipers
6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time. The
delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as
the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can be
very useful in light rain or snow.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently
loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not
clear the windshield well, making it harder to see
and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts. For more information,
see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-53.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
Turn the band to mist for a single wiping
cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let
go. The wipers stop after one wipe. Hold the band on
mist longer, for more wipe cycles.
9 (Off):
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
6
(Low Speed): Turn the band away from you to
the first solid band past the delay settings, for steady
wiping at low speed.
? (High Speed):
Turn the band further, to the
second solid band past the delay settings, for
high-speed wiping.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
Your vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshield wipers.
These wipers automatically turn on when a sensor,
mounted next to the inside rearview mirror, detects
moisture on the windshield. When active, these wipers
are able to detect moisture on the windshield and
automatically turn on the wipers.
3-10
To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers must
be set to one of the five delay settings. Each of the
five settings adjusts the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Since different drivers have different setting preferences,
it is recommended that the mid-range setting, position
three, be used initially. For more wipes, select the higher
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings located
closer to the off position on the multifunction lever.
The rain sensor will automatically control the frequency
of the wipes from off to high speed according to the
weather conditions. The wipers can be left in a
Rainsense™ mode even when it is not raining.
When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlamps will turn
on automatically after approximately eight wipes.
The headlamps will turn off if the wiper switch is set to a
delay position, and there have been no wipes for
approximately three minutes, or if the wiper switch is
turned to the off position. If it is dark outside, the
headlamps will remain on.
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
L (Washer Fluid):
Push the paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The
wipers clear the window and then either stop or return
to the preset speed.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
3-11
Heated Windshield Washer
For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid
system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,
or bugs from your windshield.
The button is located in
the switchbank under the
climate controls.
Push the heated washer fluid button to activate the
heated windshield washer fluid system. The indicator
light will flash. This activation initiates four heated
wash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle may
take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside
temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take
up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to
begin. Press the button again to turn off the heated
windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically
turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system
is activated under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam may flow out of the washer nozzles
for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed.
This is a normal condition.
3-12
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The rear wiper control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a wiper
position.
9 (Off): To turn the wiper off, slide the lever to this
setting.
5 (Rear Wiper Delay):
To turn on the rear wiper
delay, slide the lever to this setting.
Z (Rear Wiper):
To turn on the rear wiper, slide the
lever to this setting.
= (Rear Wiper Wash):
To turn on the rear wiper
wash, push the button on the end of the turn
signal/multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the
rear window. The wipers will clear the rear window and
either stop or return to your preset speed. For more
washer cycles, press and hold the button.
The rear window wiper/washer will not operate if the
liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgate or
liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on, the wiper
will return to the parked position and stop.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
turns off.
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system and begins
to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the
cruise control back on.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3-13
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
{CAUTION:
T (On/Off): This button can both activate and turn
off the system. The indicator light on the button turns on
when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise
control is off.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to
make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press this button to set the speed
or make the vehicle decelerate.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
[ (Cancel):
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
Press this button to cancel cruise control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
3-14
2. Get up to the desired speed.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the
cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
press the +RES button on your steering wheel. The
vehicle goes back to the previous set speed and stays
there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each
time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle slows
down to the previous set cruise speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. Of course, applying the brake disengages the
cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much
trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
3-15
Ending Cruise Control
It controls the following systems:
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
• Press the On/Off button on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps control
is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
•
•
•
•
•
Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
O (Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off the
automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps (DRL).
Turning the headlamp control to the off position again will
turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will only
work for vehicles that are shifted into the PARK (P)
position.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the following:
•
•
•
•
3-16
Parking Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
;
(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
2
(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps together with the following lamps
listed below.
•
•
•
•
Parking Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is
on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are
turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will
stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to
prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the
headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp
on position to make the headlamps stay on for an
additional 10 minutes.
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when the headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition
is off and a door is open. To disable the chime, turn
the light off.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on.
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
The transmission is not in PARK (P).
The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not
be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
3-17
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior lamps
control to the OFF position and then release. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must be
in the PARK (P) position, before the DRL lamps can
be turned off.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
system will turn on the headlamps at the normal
brightness, along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking
lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio
lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release
it. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission
must be in the PARK (P) position, before the automatic
headlamp system can be turned off.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates
when the automatic headlamps turn on. Be sure it is not
covered, or the headlamps will come on whenever
the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
3-18
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor detects a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During that
delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as
bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel
brightness control is in the full bright position. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-19.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the control to the off position.
The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. This feature can be programmed using the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-64.
The regular headlamp system can be turned on when
needed.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps, the
control is located next to the exterior lamps control
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering
column.
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights and
is located next to the exterior lamp control.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the fog
lamps to come on.
Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on or off. A light
will come on in the instrument panel cluster.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the instrument panel lights. Turning the
knob to the farthest clockwise position turns on the
dome lamps.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the headlamps
automatically turn on.
Dome Lamps
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the
fog lamps also go off. When the high-beam headlamps
go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob, located next to
the exterior lamps control, clockwise to the farthest
position. In this position, the dome lamps remain
on whether a door is opened or closed.
3-19
Dome Lamp Override
Front Reading Lamps
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome
lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press
the button again to return it to the extended position so
that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome override button is in the extended
position. If the dome override button is pressed in, the
lamps will not come on.
Exit Lighting
The interior lamps come on when the key is removed
from the ignition. They turn off automatically in
20 seconds. The lights do not come on if the dome
override button is pressed in.
3-20
To turn the reading lamps on or off, press the button
located next to each lamp.
The lamps can be adjusted to a desired direction.
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp. These lamps are fixed and
cannot be adjusted.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up
or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert
will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, and reading lamps
if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when
the ignition is off. This will keep the battery from
running down.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
There are two under the climate controls, one inside the
center floor console, one on the rear of the center
floor console and one accessory power outlet in the rear
cargo area on the passenger side.
To use an accessory power outlet, remove the protective
cap. When not in use, always cover the accessory
power outlet with the protective cap.
3-21
The accessory power outlets are powered, even with
the ignition off. Continuing to use accessory power
outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF may cause the
vehicle’s battery to run down.
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into a
power outlet, the battery may drain causing your
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery.
This would not be covered by the warranty. Always
unplug all electrical devices when turning off
your vehicle.
Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to the
accessory power outlet and could result in blown
adapter or vehicle fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on
the accessory power plugs.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment. Do not use equipment exceeding the
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
3-22
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The front ashtray is located near the center of the
instrument panel or on the front console, if equipped.
Pull on the ashtray door to open it.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle can
be controlled with this system. Your vehicle also has
a flow-through ventilation system described later in this
section.
Driver’s Side Temperature Control
The driver’s side temperature buttons are used to adjust
the temperature of the air coming through the system on
the driver’s side. The temperature can be adjusted even if
the system is turned off. This is possible since outside air
will always flow through the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See
“Recirculation” later in this section.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
cabin temperature. The driver side temperature display
will show the temperature setting decreasing or
increasing.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Control
The passenger’s temperature buttons can be used to
change the temperature of the air coming through
the system on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The
temperature can be adjusted even if the system is
turned off. This is possible since outside air will always
flow through the system as the vehicle is moving
forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See
“Recirculation” later in this section.
Different climate control settings can be selected for the
driver and passengers.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
cabin temperature. The passenger side display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing.
3-23
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to match
the driver’s temperature setting by pressing the PASS
button and turning off the PASS indicator. When the
passenger’s temperature setting is set different than the
driver’s setting, the indicator on the PASS button will
illuminate and both the driver’s side and passenger’s side
temperature displays will be shown.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature, the
air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current temperature(s) and AUTO will
be lit on the display. The current delivery mode and
fan speed will also be displayed for approximately
5 seconds.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run
when the outside temperature is over about
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air.
3-24
If it is hot outside, the air inlet may automatically
switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly
cool down the vehicle. The light on the button will
illuminate in recirculation.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Use the driver’s or
passenger’s temperature buttons to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the solar sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This
sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and
also turns on the headlamps. For more information on
the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system will
delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off the climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be
changed by pressing the mode button. Recirculation
can be selected once vent or bi-level mode has
been selected. The temperature can also be adjusted
using either temperature button. If the air delivery mode
or temperature settings are adjusted with the system
off, the display will illuminate briefly to show you
the settings and then return off. Press the on/off button
or the up down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost
button, AUTO button, or the air conditioning button
to turn the system on when it is off.
Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or
fan speed.
y9 z (Fan):
The buttons with the fan symbols
allow you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the
up arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow
to decrease fan speed.
Pressing one of these buttons when the system is off
will turn the system on. Pressing one of these buttons
when in automatic control will place the fan under
manual control. The fan setting will remain displayed
and the AUTO light will turn off. The air delivery
mode will remain under automatic control.
yN z (Mode): Press the mode up and down
buttons to manually change the direction of the airflow
in the vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the
desired mode appears on the display. Pressing one of
these buttons when the system is off will change air
delivery mode without turning the system on. Pressing
one of these buttons when in automatic control will place
the mode under manual control.
The air delivery mode setting will be displayed and the
AUTO light will turn off. The fan will remain under
automatic control.
H (Vent):
This setting will deliver air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets and half to the floor outlets.
The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets
depending upon where the knob is placed between
the settings. A little air is directed towards the windshield
and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the
windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.
3-25
- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
@ (Recirculation):
Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on. When the button is pressed, an
indicator light comes on.
This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle.
It can be used to reduce outside air and prevent
odors from entering the vehicle. Recirculation may also
help cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly once
the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the
outside temperature.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select
recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator will
flash three times and turn off. The air conditioning
compressor will also come on when this mode is
activated. While in recirculation mode the windows may
fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the
fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase
the fan speed. Recirculation mode can be turned off
by pressing the button again, or turning off the engine.
3-26
Air Conditioning
# (Air Conditioning):
Press this button to turn the
air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. When
air conditioning is selected, an indicator light comes on
to show that the air conditioning has been activated.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is too
cool for air conditioning will make the air conditioning
indicator flash three times and then turn off to show that
the air conditioning mode is not available. If the air
conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops
below a temperature which is too cool for air
conditioning to be effective, the air conditioning light will
turn off to show that the air conditioning mode has
been canceled.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it
takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip underneath
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
Sensors
The interior temperature sensors located in the headliner
above the driver side seat and if equipped, in the
headliner above the second row seats measure the
temperature of the air inside the vehicle.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in the
middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar
radiation. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system
will not work properly.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside
the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could
cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.
The climate control system uses the information from
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air
delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler
air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be used as needed to
maintain cool outlet temperatures.
3-27
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog or frost from your windshield.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog
or defrost modes.
- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
This mode directs air to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents. When this mode is selected, the
system turns off recirculation and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
0 (Defrost):
Press this button to remove fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly. This mode directs
a portion of the air to the windshield and side window
vents and some to the floor vents. In this mode, the
system will automatically force outside air into the
vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor
will run automatically in this setting, unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-28
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press this button to
turn on the rear window defogger. It will automatically
turn off several minutes after it has been activated. The
defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine. Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
is pressed.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of the instrument panel to direct the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets
at the base of the windshield that could block the
flow of air into your vehicle.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System and Electronic Climate
Controls
For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning
controls, they are integrated with the rear seat audio
controls located in the center console. The system can
be controlled from the front controls as well as the
rear controls.
To turn the system on, press the AUX button on the
front climate control system, an indicator will be
lit. Pressing the AUX button the first time will turn the
rear system on in a mimic mode. In this mode, the
airflow in the rear will be approximately the same
direction, temperature, and fan speed as the front.
Pressing the AUX button again turns the rear system
and the indicator off.
If the rear controls are adjusted, the system enters a
rear independent mode. Airflow in the rear will then be
directed according to the settings of rear controls.
The rear system can be turned off by pressing the AUX
button on the front climate control system and the
indicator will turn off.
If the indicator in the front AUX button is off, the rear
system is off.
3-29
To turn the system on from the rear, press any rear
climate control button, except the C button. To turn the
system off, press and hold the C button.
+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Press the + or
− buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature.
The rear control temperature display will show the
temperature setting decreasing or increasing.
The display only indicates climate control functions
when the system is in rear independent mode.
Manual Operation
D C (Fan):
Use the fan buttons on the rear seat audio
control panel to manually adjust the fan speed. To
increase or decrease the airflow, press the D or
C button. Pressing the fan up button when the system
is off will turn the system on. The air delivery mode
will remain under automatic control. To turn the
rear system off, keep pressing the C button.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls
Automatic Operation, If Equipped.
AUTO: Press the mode button until this setting is
selected to control the inside temperature, the air
delivery, and the fan speed. AUTO will illuminate in the
display when automatic operation is active.
3-30
+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): These buttons
select the temperature of the air flowing into the
passenger area. Press the + button for warmer air and
press the − button for cooler air.
N (Mode):
Press the mode button to manually change
the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly
press the button until the desired mode appears on the
display. Multiple presses will cycle through the
delivery selections.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
the details show on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just
to let you know they are working. If you are familiar with
this section, you should not be alarmed when this
happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even
dangerous. So please get to know your vehicle’s
warning lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with warning lights and gages. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for
more information.
3-31
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States version shown, Canada similar
The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
economically.
3-32
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
Safety Belt Reminders
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for approximately one second
while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
3-33
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-85 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for several
seconds and then flash for several more.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-75.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-34
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The
light should go out and the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you start the engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a
problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for
more information.
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
3-35
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
3-36
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-85
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-34 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Charging System Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, but the engine
is not running, as a
check to show you it is
working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56
for more information. This light could indicate that you
have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If
you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-37
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on, this gage shows
the battery’s state of
charge in DC volts.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage may
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings between the low and
high warning zones indicate the normal operating range.
3-38
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
come on when you set the parking brake. If you try to
drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime will sound
when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
This light may also come on due to low brake fluid. See
Brakes on page 5-36 for more information.
United States
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or may go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on
page 4-40.
Canada
3-39
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light will come
on briefly when you
start the engine.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it
is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-39
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for all
brake related DIC messages.
3-40
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
For vehicles that have the
StabiliTrak® system, this
warning light should
come on briefly when the
engine is started.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If
it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may
be a problem with your StabiliTrak® system and your
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on,
the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on and
stays on for an extended period of time when the system
is turned on, your vehicle needs service. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more information.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
This light will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for more
information.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so.
If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See
Tires on page 5-55 for more information.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light will flash for approximately
60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-62 for more information.
3-41
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate that
there is an OBD II
problem and service is
required.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
3-42
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
•
•
•
•
Reduce vehicle speed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoid hard accelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
3-43
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
3-44
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
When the oil pressure reaches the low pressure
zone, the “OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE”
message will appear in the Driver Information Center.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56
and Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing
low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
3-45
Oil Pressure Light
This light will come on
briefly when you start your
engine. If it does not,
have your vehicle serviced.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-46
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
is not flowing through your engine properly. You
could be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-22.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-19 for more information.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 3-13 for more information.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9
for more information.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light comes on when
the Tow/Haul mode has
been activated.
For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-34.
3-47
Fuel Gage
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
United States
Canada
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as
possible.
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56.
3-48
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light, under the fuel
gage, will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.
This light and a chime will come on when the fuel tank is
low on fuel. There will also be a “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
message on the Driver Information Center, see DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for more
information. When you add fuel this light and message
should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
DIC Operation and Displays
(Using DIC Buttons)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also
displays warning messages if a system problem is
detected.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 3-64 for more information.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster.
You can also use the trip odometer reset stem to view
some of the DIC displays. See “DIC Operation and
Displays (Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem)” later in this
section.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the steering wheel.
For the displays available using DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (Using DIC Buttons)” later
in this section and DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 3-64.
For the displays available using the trip odometer reset
stem, see “DIC Operation and Displays (Using Trip
Odometer Reset Stem)” later in this section.
3-49
U (Customization):
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization,
and set/reset buttons.
The button functions are
detailed in the following
pages.
Press this button to customize the
feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-64 for more
information.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through
the following menu items:
Odometer
3 (Trip/Fuel):
Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average economy,
fuel used, timer, and transmission temperature.
T (Vehicle Information):
Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings, engine hours,
and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming.
3-50
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display
the odometer.
To switch between English and metric measurements,
see “Units” later in this section.
Trip Odometer
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the
trip odometer. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will also display the trip odometer.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can
be driven without refueling. The display will show
LOW if the fuel level is low.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
You can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed
by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This
estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the approximate average miles
per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu
item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press
and hold the set/reset button.
3-51
Fuel Used
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays.
This display shows the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C).
Timer
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. This
display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the timer was last
reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will
continue to be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC.
The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will
return to zero.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while
TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button while TIMER is displayed.
3-52
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information):
Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56. You should
change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16.
Units
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information
will then be displayed in the unit of measurement
selected.
Tire Pressure
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for more
information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Engine Hours
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE
HOURS displays. This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run.
3-53
Relearn Remote Key
DIC Operation and Displays
(Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem)
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an
RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS
TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
V
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-54
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on
the instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC
messages.
You can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the
following displays: odometer, engine hours, trip
odometer, and display language.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Engine Hours
To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition in
LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while
viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows the total
number of hours the engine has run.
Trip Odometer
Language
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset
for the trip odometer.
This display allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear. To select a language:
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and
holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until
the currently set language displays.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset
stem to scroll through all of the available languages.
The available languages are ENGLISH (default),
FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and NO
CHANGE.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last
turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
4. Once the desired language is displayed, release
the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.
3-55
DIC Warnings and Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure
to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information
on how to reset the message. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument
panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the
messages and to clear them from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-56
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button or the trip odometer
reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on page 5-55, Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-34, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-60. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values.
See “DIC Operation and Displays (Using DIC Buttons)”
earlier in this section. If the tire pressure is low, the
low tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 3-41.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive
gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-26
for more information.
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)
TURNED OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-41.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When
the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-41.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-28 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
3-57
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-26
for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating
temperature.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine
further enters the engine coolant protection mode.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26 for further
information.
This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven.
3-58
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while
this message is on, but acceleration and speed may be
reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
on page 3-48 and Fuel on page 5-5 for more
information.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is
not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in
a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a
drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check
to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and
liftglass. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display.
PARK ASSIST OFF
After the vehicle has been started, this message
displays to remind the driver that the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system has been turned
off. Press the set/reset button or the trip odometer reset
stem to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display. To turn the URPA system back on, see
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-44.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 2-5 and “DIC Operation and Displays (Using
DIC Buttons)” earlier in this section for more information.
3-59
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be
replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 2-5.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect
the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-34 and Airbag System on page 1-75 for more
information.
3-60
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn
on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
Light on page 3-37. Driving with this problem could
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as
possible. See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake system.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-39. If this
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off
the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the
brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE BRAKES SOON
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If
the message is still displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service. See
your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has the Autoride® suspension system,
this message displays when the Autoride® suspension
system is not operating properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
This message displays if there is a problem with the
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do not
use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-44 for more
information. See your dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak® system. If you see this message, try to reset
the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You
should see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle
is safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit
of StabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and drive
accordingly.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See
PASS-Key® III+ Operation on page 2-24 for more
information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-41. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 5-64 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
3-61
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when there is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message displays, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See your dealer/retailer for service. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-6 for more information.
STABILITRAK OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or when the stability
control has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel
spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak® on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak®
off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or
snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to
free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions
and require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-32. To turn
the StabiliTrak® system on or off, see StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-6.
3-62
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-39.
• The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s
fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-42. Reinstall the fuel cap fully.
See Filling the Tank on page 5-7. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn
this light and message off.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on your
vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-67, Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 5-62, and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-60 for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned
off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-6 for more information.
This message displays along with a continuous chime if
the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving
with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it
idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message
clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature
reaches a safe level.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
3-63
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for the location of the windshield
washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 5-35 for more information.
DIC Vehicle Customization (With
DIC Buttons)
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
3-64
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11 for more
information.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
You can also change the language by pressing the trip
odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in
this section for more information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
PARK (P).
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-65
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Locks on page 2-11 for more information.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-66
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will
not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 2-5 for more information.
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed.
When locking the doors and liftgate with the power
door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this
feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear
three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for
this feature to work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice.
See Delayed Locking on page 2-11 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s
doors.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door or the liftgate is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
3-67
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the
vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more
information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-68
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a
normal level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 2-42 for
more information.
3-69
EASY EXIT SEAT
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-4
for more information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the
automatic movement has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat
will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory
recall took place prior to removing the key again.
3-70
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
on page 1-4 for more information.
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored
driving position when the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On
some vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake
pedal feature, the pedals will also automatically move.
See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation
and Displays (Using DIC Buttons) on page 3-49 or DIC
Operation and Displays (Using Trip Odometer Reset
Stem) on page 3-54 for more information on matching
transmitters to driver ID numbers.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-8 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
3-71
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT
FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
and exited.
selection made.
3-72
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. Here
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-27 for more
information.
3-73
Setting the Clock
MP3 Radio with a Single CD and DVD
Player
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD and DVD
player, it has a H button for setting the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow the instructions:
1. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or the
FWD (forward) button.
\
3. To decrease, press the left © SEEK arrow or the
s REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the f
knob, located on the upper right side of the radio,
to adjust the selected setting.
3-74
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
You can change the time default setting from 12 hours
to 24 hours or change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year.
To change the time or date default settings, follow these
instructions:
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow that is currently
displayed on the radio screen until the time
12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD
(month and day) and DD/MM (day and month)
are displayed.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the H button again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen time out.
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, it
has a MENU button instead of the H button to set
the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
displays, press the pushbutton located under
that label. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or the
FWD (forward) button.
\
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
You can change the time default setting from 12 hours
to 24 hours or change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year.
To change the time or date default settings, follow these
instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
displays, press the pushbutton located under
the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the
radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),
and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen time out.
• To decrease, press the left © SEEK arrow or
the s REV (reverse) button. You can also
turn the f knob, located on the upper right side
of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
3-75
Radio(s) (MP3)
Radio with CD and DVD
Radio with Six-Disc CD
3-76
Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
Radios with CD and DVD
Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose® Surround
Sound System. Some of its features are explained later
in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)”.
If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-105 for more
information on the vehicle’s RSE system.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate.
The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed
DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS
Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.).
Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories.
Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby® Laboratories.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The
RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
only works when the information is available.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters displays. In rare cases, a
radio station could broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
Noise Compensation Technology: Your vehicle has a
Bose® Audio System. It includes Bose AudioPilot® noise
compensation technology. When turned on, AudioPilot®
continuously adjusts the audio system equalization, to
compensate for background noise, so that music always
sounds the same at the set volume level.
This feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how well the
music is heard. At higher volume settings, where the
music is much louder than the background noise, there
might be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot®.
3-77
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3,
To activate:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the ON label. The
display times out after approximately 10 seconds.
For additional information on AudioPilot®, please visit
www.bose.com/audiopilot.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™
(if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune):
Turn to select radio stations.
and RDS Features): Press to display additional text
information related to the current FM-RDS or XM™
station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the
labels and the information about that label displays.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature.
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a few
seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were
previously adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either arrow to go to the previous
or to the next station and stay there.
3-78
To store a station as a favorite, perform the
following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. You can also adjust the highlighted setting
by pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward), or
s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels
are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or if there
is static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
3-79
EQ (Equalization): Press to change Digital Signal
Processing (DSP) settings (Bose® audio systems only).
DSP settings provide a choice of different listening
experiences.
The following DSP settings are available:
• Normal — Select this setting to adjust the audio for
normal mode. This provides the best sound quality
for all seating positions.
• Driver — Select this setting to adjust the audio for
the driver to receive the best possible sound
quality.
• Rear — Select this setting to adjust the audio for
the rear seat passengers to receive the best
possible sound quality.
• Surround (Centerpoint®) — Select this setting to
enable Bose Centerpoint®. Centerpoint® signal
processing produces a surround sound listening
experience from a CD or XM™ stereo digital audio
source. Centerpoint® delivers five independent
audio channels from conventional two channel
stereo recordings. (Not available for AM, FM.)
3-80
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the
desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. The
highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until
the desired levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
stations when the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform
the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
• Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the
category list by pressing the
the \ FWD button.
s REV button or
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first
XM™ station associated with that category.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow
to go to the previous or to the next XM™ station
within the selected category.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
3-81
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM™ service. For
more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca
or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
3-82
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-104 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD(s)
LOAD ^: Press to load CDs into the CD player. This
CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the LOAD ^ button, Load Disc
and then Insert Disc 1 displays.
2. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side up.
Loading Disc 1 displays as the disc is being pulled
into the player.
3. Once the CD is loaded, Disc 1 and Track 1 displays
as the CD starts playback.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
(loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing).
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The
CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or
by the RSA unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on
page 3-115 for more information. The DVD/CD decks,
(upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD
deck) of the radio are compatible with most audio
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD symbol
displays on the left side of the radio display. As each new
track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Care of Your CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle them
carefully. Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD or DVD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD
does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
3-83
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, try labeling
the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Z EJECT or CD (Eject):
Press and release to eject
the disc that is currently playing. A CD ejecting from a
radio with CD and DVD, ejects from the bottom slot. A
beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The disc can be
removed. If the disc is not removed, after several
seconds, the disc automatically pulls back into the player.
3-84
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
Z DVD (Eject):
Press and release to eject the disc
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
f (Tune):
Turn to select tracks on the CD that is
currently playing.
© SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
For Radios with CD and DVD, Press the left arrow to go
to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds
on the CD have played. If less than five seconds on the
CD have played, the previous track plays. Press the right
arrow to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound
at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing
the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player.
To use random, do one of the following:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or press and hold the
^ button. A beep sounds and Load All Discs
displays. Insert one or more discs partway into the
slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
To play the tracks from a CD loaded in the radio
with CD and DVD, press the DVD/CD AUX
button when not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc
partway into the slot. A RDM label displays.
To play tracks from a single CD in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
For the radio with CD and DVD, press to listen to the
radio when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or
DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for
viewing entertainment.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing the disc and/or track number displays
when a CD is in the player. Press this button again
and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device, such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Input Device
Found” displays.
3-85
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The
DVD/CD text label and a message showing the track or
chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot.
Press again and the system automatically searches
for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the
DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles between the two sources and not indicate “No
Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-105 for more
information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use
the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
3-86
Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time. An audio source is defined as
DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack,
or Rear Auxiliary Jack.
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM,
or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the
DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front
or rear auxiliary input (if available).
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the
front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from
this source through the vehicle speakers. See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-105 for more
information.
In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear
speakers can be muted when the RSA power is
turned on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-115
for more information.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Radios with a Six-Disc CD player have the capability of
playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW
disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
Radios with a CD and DVD player have the capability of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For
more information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or
radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC
and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
Radios with a CD and DVD player may display other
messages when an error occurs:
Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT
problems.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
Radios with a CD and DVD player displays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid or
unknown format.
3-87
Using the DVD Player
Playing a DVD
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-105
and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-115 for more
information.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The
DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or
chapter number displays when a disc is in either
slot. Press again and the system automatically searches
for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the
DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles between the two sources and not indicate “No
Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-105 for more
information.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and
WMA formats.
If an error message displays on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-105
and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for
more information.
3-88
O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds
to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system and to start the parental control feature.
Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant
from operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or
remote control.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press the right arrow
to go to the next track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
s REV (Fast Reverse):
Press to quickly reverse the
CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio
displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
A lock symbol displays next to the clock display. The
parental control feature remains on until you press and
hold this knob for more than two seconds again, or
until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to
manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date
settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See
the information given earlier in this section specific to the
radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the Clock”
in the index, for setting the clock and date.
Z (Eject):
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press the left
arrow to return to the start of the current track or
chapter. Press the left arrow again to go to the previous
track or chapter. This button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.
Press to fast forward the
CD or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
forwarding, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
Press to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD or
DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to
eject, press and hold for more than five seconds to
force the disc to eject.
3-89
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for
more information.
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V
menus and controls through the remote control. See
“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 3-105 for more information. The
Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is
inserted into the DVD slot.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on display, the system is in pause
mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the
system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off,
press the play button to turn the screen on.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
movie automatically, press the pushbutton located under
the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. If
the DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions, if available.
c (Stop):
Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter):
Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu):
Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons
located under the navigation arrows to navigate
the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a
selection press this button. This button only operates
when using a DVD.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
q (Return):
Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
3-90
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows
several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option
during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after,
for more information.
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-105 for more information. The Video
Screen does not automatically power on when the
DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually
turned on by the rear seat occupant through the
remote control power button.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on the display, the system is in
pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on the display,
the system is in playback mode.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
e (Audio Stream):
Press to cycle through audio
stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video
screen shows the audio stream changing.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not accept
some paper labeled media. The player starts loading the
disc into the system and show “Loading Disc” on the radio
display. At the same time, the radio displays a softkey
menu of option(s). Some discs automatically play the
movie while others default to the softkey menu display,
which requires the Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to
be pressed; either by softkey or by the rear seat
passenger using the remote control.
Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
q Group r: Press to cycle through musical
groupings on the DVD-A disc.
3-91
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
press the c button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause
symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is
sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the
DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button
on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the
radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last
stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote
control. If the disc has been ejected or the stop
button has been pressed twice on the remote control,
the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc. If a
disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the
radio reloads the disc after a short period of time. The
disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not resume
play of the disc automatically. If the RSA system
is sourced to the DVD, the movie when reloaded into
the DVD player begins to play again.
3-92
In case loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be
completed (unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails
to eject, press and hold the DVD Z button more than
five seconds to force the disc to eject.
DVD Radio Error Messages
Player Error: This message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use
as another source for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio
device’s volume to the loudest level.
It is always best to power your portable audio device
through its own battery while playing.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might have to be made from the portable device if the
volume is not loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or turn
it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to cycle through
DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio.
The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or
chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot.
Press again and the system automatically searches
for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the
DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles between the two sources and not indicate “No
Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-105 for more
information.
3-93
Using an MP3 (Radio with Six-Disc
Player)
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160
kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a
variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. By
default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left
side of the screen but plays both file formats in the
order in which they were recorded to the disc.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure the CD does not have more than a
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
3-94
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a
large number of files, folders, playlists or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on the
display, potentially getting cut off.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc may cause the disc
not to function in the player.
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
next folder buttons, the f (tune) knob, or the ©
SEEK¨ arrows. You can also play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW that was recorded using no file folders. If
a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but
all items over the maximum are not accessible.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory is displayed as the CD label. All files
contained directly under the root directory are accessed
prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)
are always be accessed before root folders or files.
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA)
and MP3 files, a folder under the root directory called
CD access all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
3-95
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The S c (previous)
and next c T folder functions do not display on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
The song name that is displayed is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, the radio display is blank
following the track indicator.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
3-96
Preprogrammed playlists that were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Wait for the message to insert a disc, label side up. The
player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should
begin playing.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R or CD-RW
in the player it stays in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD-R or CD-RW starts to play where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
Sc (Previous Folder):
Z EJECT:
Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can be removed. If the
CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the
player and begins playing. For multiple discs, press and
hold this button for two seconds to eject all discs.
Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
cT (Next Folder):
Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
3-97
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on
the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all
discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one
of the following:
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
3-98
h (Music Navigator):
Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below
the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to
sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It
can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on
the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
or CD-RW begins playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist
playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are
played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetic
order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begin playing MP3 files
by that artist. If you want to listen to MP3 files by another
artist, press the pushbutton located below either arrow
button. You will go to the next or previous artist in
alphabetic order. Continue pressing either button until the
desired artist is displayed.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label
to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the
album name displays on the second line between the
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the player
moves to the next album in alphabetic order on the CD-R
or CD-RW and begin playing MP3 files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD remains safely inside the radio for
future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number displays
when a CD is in the player. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Input Device
Found” displays.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA files
depending on which slot the disc is loaded into. By default
the radio reads only the uncompressed audio (.CDA) and
ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CD
deck, press the CAT (category) button to toggle between
compressed and uncompressed audio format, the default
being the uncompressed format (.CDA).
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play
a maximum combination of 512 files and folders.
The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read
255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.
3-99
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls
extension as other file extensions might not work.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists could cause the player to be unable
to play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large
number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on the
display, potentially getting cut off.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the disc
not to function in the player.
3-100
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file
structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does
not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that is displayed is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename displays.
Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top or
bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and
the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu
appears and allows navigation of the disc. The menu
reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play order), a
Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or down
through available folders), a PL tag if the disc has a
Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist
tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey
only or the menu as previously described.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player it stays in the player. When you
turn on the ignition or radio, the CD-R starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
3-101
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
f (Tune):
Z CD (Eject):
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have
played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the
right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.
Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the
bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The
CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or
CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R
or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold this button for more than five seconds
to force the disc to eject.
Z DVD (Eject):
Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R automatically
pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD
cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and
the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more
than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
3-102
Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing.
Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
cT (Next Folder):
Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA
file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in
random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA
files from the CD-R or CD-RW you are listening to in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the
CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. If you want to listen to MP3/WMA
files by another artist, press the pushbutton located
below either arrow button. The disc goes to the next or
previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing
either button until the desired artist is displayed.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back
label to return to the main music navigator screen. Now
the album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begin
to play. Once all songs from that album are played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order
on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA
files from that album.
To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning,
press the pushbutton located below the music
navigator label or eject the disc.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
3-103
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside
the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such
as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-105
for more information.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
3-104
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune to another channel.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message appears after
having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the Navigation System manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the vehicle’s
audio system. The DVD player is part of the front radio.
The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player, a
video display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless
headphones, and a remote control. See Radio(s) (MP3)
on page 3-76 for more information on the vehicle’s
audio/DVD system.
3-105
Before You Drive
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or
ejecting any disc, pressing the play icon on the radio DVD
display menu, or changing an ignition position.
Headphones
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system
might not work until the temperature is within the
operating range. The operating range for the RSE system
is above −4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C). If the
temperature of your vehicle is outside of this range, heat
or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the
operating range of the RSE system.
Parental Control
The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio you have. To start Parental
Control, press and hold the radio power button for more
than two seconds to stop all system features such
as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While
Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
The radio can be turned back on with a single press of
the power button, but the RSE system will remain
under Parental Control.
To turn Parental Control off, press and hold the radio
power button for more than two seconds. The RSE
returns from where it was previously left and the padlock
icon disappears from the radio display.
3-106
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the DVD player, while Channel 2 is
dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones can be
used to listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs,
any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the
auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle has this feature. The
wireless headphones have an On/Off button, channel
1/2 switch, and a volume control.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones.
An indicator light located on the headphones comes on.
If the light comes on but, there is intermittent sound
and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator light
does not come on, the batteries might need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section
for more information. Switch the headphones to Off
when not in use.
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE
overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE
system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are
out of range of the transmitters for more than
three minutes. If you move too far forward or step out of
the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.
The headphones automatically turn off after four hours
of continuous use.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left) appears on
the upper left side, above the ear pad and should be
positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should
be positioned on the right ear.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. Refer to your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the
door screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-107
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video
screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD
player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the
remote control switches the video screen from the
DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can
listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device
by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio(s) (MP3) on
page 3-76 for more information.
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console,
allow audio or video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
game unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors
or cables (not included) might be required to connect
the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
3-108
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change any
feature, do the following:
1. Press the
control.
z (display menu) button on the remote
2. Use the remote control n, q, p, o (navigation)
arrows and the enter button to use the setup menu.
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup
menu from the screen.
Audio Output
Video Screen
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
heard through the following possible sources:
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if your vehicle has this feature.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available. See
“Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if your
vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the RSA system. See
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-115 for more
information.
When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the
radio’s auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle has this feature,
the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from the
auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to listen
to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers
by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on. This is normal, and
the DVD continues to play through the previous audio
source. Use the remote control power button or eject the
disc to turn off the screen.
The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters
for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers
for the remote control. They are located at the rear
of the console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-109
Remote Control
Remote Control Buttons
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and
press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very
bright light could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter
to receive signals from the remote control. If the
remote control does not seem to be working, the
batteries might need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section. Objects blocking the
line of sight could also affect the function of the
remote control.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control power button can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
turn on the video screen display. See Radio(s) (MP3) on
page 3-76 for more information.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Storage
in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the
remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new
universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control uses a
code set of Toshiba®.
3-110
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen
on and off.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight automatically
times out after seven to ten seconds if no other button
is pressed while the backlight is on.
v (Title):
Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD. This function could vary for
each disc.
c (Stop):
y (Main Menu):
s (Play/Pause):
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
While the DVD is playing, the DVD can be played slowly
by pressing the play/pause button then pressing the
fast forward button. The DVD continues playing in a slow
play mode. Also, reverse can be played slowly by
pressing the play/pause button and then pressing the
fast reverse button. To cancel slow play mode, press the
play/pause button.
Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.
r (Enter):
Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the
brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button operates only when the display menu or a DVD
menu is active.
Press this button to stop playing, fast
reversing, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
Press this button to start playing a
DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to
pause it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button might not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
u (Next Track/Chapter):
Press this button to go to
the beginning of the next chapter or track. This
button might not work while the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
3-111
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to quickly
reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD
video, press the play/pause button. To stop fast
reversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fast reverse
button. This button might not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
video, press the play/pause button. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release the fast forward
button. This button might not work while the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
e (Audio):
Press this button to change audio tracks on
DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
vary for each disc.
3-112
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
d (Camera):
Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature while a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary for
each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
\ (Clear):
Press this button within three seconds after
entering a numeric selection, to clear all numerical
inputs.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers greater than nine. Press
this button before entering the number.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the rear cover back on the remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make
sure that they are installed correctly, using the
diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the battery and keep it in a cool, dry place.
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the Check the display mode
screen. There are black
settings in the setup menu
borders on the top and
by pressing the display
bottom or on both sides or menu button on the remote
it looks stretched out.
control.
In auxiliary mode, the
Check the auxiliary input
picture moves or scrolls.
connections at both
devices.
Problem
The remote control does
not work.
Recommended Action
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
the DVD starts where I left DVD player resumes
off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD
beginning.
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player
begins to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is
Check that the RSE video
running but there is no
screen is in the auxiliary
picture or sound.
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
3-113
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
I lost the remote and/or
See your dealer/retailer
the headphones.
for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but
Check that the RSE video
there is no picture or
screen is sourced to the
sound.
DVD player.
DVD Display Error Messages
The DVD display error message depends on the radio
that is in the vehicle. The video screen can display
one of the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays when
there are disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when Z EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed
on the radio.
DVD Distortion
Video distortion can occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use
only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result.
3-114
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and
control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or
other auxiliary sources. However, the rear seat
passengers can only control the music sources the front
seat passengers are not listening to (except on some
radios where dual control is allowed). For example, rear
seat passengers can control and listen to a CD through
the headphones, while the driver listens to the radio
through the speakers. The rear seat passengers have
control of the volume for each set of wired headphones.
You can operate the RSA functions even when the
main radio is off. The front audio system will display the
headphone icon when the RSA is on, and will
disappear from the display when it is off.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not
included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If
your vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard
on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
RSA with HVAC shown, RSA without HVAC similar
P (Power): Press the
and off.
P button to turn RSA on
The front audio system displays the headphone icon
when the RSA is on and the headphone icon disappears
from the display when it is off.
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the
volume of the wired headphones. The left knob
controls the left headphones and the right knob controls
the right headphones.
To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through
the RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the
front auxiliary input (if available), on the front audio
system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the front auxiliary
input with the RSA SRCE button.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if
your vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary.
3-115
©¨ (Seek):
When listening to FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped), press the left © or right ¨ seek arrow to
go to the next or the previous station or channels and
stay there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if
the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Press and hold either the left © or right ¨ seek arrow
until the display flashes, to tune to an individual
station. The display stops flashing after the buttons
have not been pushed for more than two seconds. This
function is inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the radio.
While listening to a disc, press the © seek arrow to go
back to the start of the current track or chapter (if
more than ten seconds have played). Press the right ¨
seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the
disc. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press
either the left © or right ¨ seek arrow to perform a
cursor up or down on the menu. Hold either the left ©
or right¨ seek arrow to perform a cursor left or right
on the menu.
3-116
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station or channel set on the main
radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,
press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs
are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the menu function, Enter.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC, LOCK, or LOCKED could
display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
your vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the
following:
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and
hold this button for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this button
for longer than one second to interact with the
OnStar® system. If your vehicle also has the navigation
system, press and hold this button for longer than
one second to initiate voice recognition and say “OnStar”
to enter OnStar® mode. See the OnStar® System on
page 2-47 in this manual for more information.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if your
vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
rear auxiliary.
xw (Next/Previous): Press the down or up arrow to
go to the next or to the previous radio station stored
as a favorite.
When a CD/DVD is playing, press either arrow to go to
the next or previous track or chapter.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release this
button to silence the vehicle speakers only. The
audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if your
vehicle has these features, does not mute. Press and
release this button again, to turn the sound on.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
button to increase or to decrease the radio volume.
¨ (Seek):
Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio
station while in AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped). Press
the seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter
while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press the seek
arrow to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD
player, if multiple discs are loaded.
3-117
Radio Reception
FM Stereo
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
AM
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss of
the XM signal for a period of time. The radio may
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost the
power levels during the day, and then reduce these
levels during the night. Static can also occur when things
like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
3-118
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Rear Side Window Antenna
Your AM-FM antenna is located in the passenger rear
side windows. Make sure the inside surfaces of the rear
side windows are not scratched and that the lines on
the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces
are damaged, they could interfere with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside of the rear side windows may affect
radio reception or damage the rear window
defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
side windows with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be
covered by your warranty.
Because this antenna is built into the rear side windows,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car
washes and vandals.
If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone
to your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure you do not damage the grid
lines for the AM-FM antennas or place the cellular
telephone antenna over the grid lines.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
3-119
✍ NOTES
3-120
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3
Braking .........................................................4-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5
Locking Differential .........................................4-5
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .........................4-8
Steering ........................................................4-8
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
Passing .......................................................4-11
Loss of Control .............................................4-12
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-13
Driving at Night ............................................4-25
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-26
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-27
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-27
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-28
Winter Driving ..............................................4-29
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow ...................................................4-32
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-32
Recovery Hooks ...........................................4-33
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-34
Towing ..........................................................4-40
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-40
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-40
Level Control ...............................................4-41
Autoride® .....................................................4-41
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-42
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-55
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-28.
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Drunk Driving
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Braking
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-39.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
4-3
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
4-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on. This
is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-40.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might feel
the brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this is
normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In
many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Locking Differential
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking differential
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice,
sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the wheels has no traction and
the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
4-5
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may be equipped with the StabiliTrak®
system which combines antilock brake, traction
and stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away,
the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. You may hear or feel the system
working. This is normal and does not mean there is a
problem with your vehicle. The system should initialize
before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). In some
cases, it may take approximately two miles of driving
before the system initializes.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak®
light along with one of the following messages will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC):
TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make
sure the StabiliTrak® system has not been turned
off using the StabiliTrak® on/off button.
4-6
Then turn the steering wheel clockwise from the nine
o’clock position to the three o’clock position. If this clears
the message(s), your vehicle does not need servicing.
If this does not clear the message(s), then turn the
vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and then turn it back on
again to reset the system. If any of these messages still
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC), your
vehicle should be taken in for service. For more
information on the DIC messages, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-49.
The StabiliTrak® light will
flash on the instrument
panel cluster when
the system is both on and
activated.
You may also feel or hear the system working; this is
normal.
The traction control disable
button is located on the
instrument panel below the
climate controls.
The traction control part of StabiliTrak® can be turned
off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button
if both systems (traction control and StabiliTrak®) were
previously on. To disable both traction control and
StabiliTrak®, press and hold the button for five seconds.
Traction control and StabiliTrak® can be turned on by
pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button if
not automatically shut off for any other reason.
When the TCS or StabiliTrak® system is turned off, the
StabiliTrak® light and the appropriate TCS off or
StabiliTrak® off message will be displayed on the DIC to
warn the driver. Your vehicle will still have brake-traction
control when traction control is off, but will not be
able to use the engine speed management system. See
“Traction Control Operation” next for more information.
When the traction control system has been turned off,
you may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to
attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 4-32.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak®
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle. It will activate and the
StabiliTrak® light will flash if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while
driving. If you turn off traction control, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will work.
4-7
The engine speed management will be disabled. In this
mode, engine power is not reduced automatically and the
driven wheels can spin more freely. This can cause the
brake-traction control to activate constantly.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-13.
4-8
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
all the time.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It
is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
4-9
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-3. It
is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-11
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-12
Off-Road Driving
If your vehicle has 20-inch tire/wheel assemblies, you
should not drive off-road unless you are on a level, solid
surface. See Tires on page 5-55.
Many of the same design features that help make your
vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather
conditions — features like all-wheel drive — help make it
much better suited for off-road use than a conventional
passenger car. Its higher ground clearance also helps
your vehicle step over some off-road obstacles. But your
vehicle does not have features like special underbody
shielding and a transfer case low gear range, things that
are usually thought necessary for extended or severe
off-road service. This guide is for operating your vehicle
off paved roads.
Also, see Braking on page 4-3.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide. You
will find many driving tips and suggestions. These
will help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
fascia lower air dam.
The front fascia lower air dam is held in place by
two bolts and 10 snap features. The bolts and snap
features are accessible from underneath the front fascia.
4-13
The following steps must be performed on the bolts and
snap features to remove the air dam:
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
2. With a flat-blade screwdriver, push down on the
snap features and disengage the snaps.
3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it
is free.
When you are back on roads, though, be sure to
replace the air dam.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front fascia lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flow to the engine.
Always be sure to replace the front fascia air
dam when you are finished off-road driving.
To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:
1. Line up the snap features and push the air dam
rearward to engage the snaps.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.
4-14
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields, if the vehicle has them, are properly
attached. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully
inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be?
What are the local laws that apply to off-roading
where you will be driving? If you do not know, you
should check with law enforcement people in the area.
Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be
sure to get the necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
•
•
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34 and Tires
on page 5-55.
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or
disturb wildlife. This includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees, or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
4-15
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires where permitted,
camp stoves, and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet, and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• You approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• You have less time to react.
• You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• You will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
4-16
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you are
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things to
consider.
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking
distances.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
4-17
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunk Driving on page 4-2.
4-18
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend,
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
Here are some things to consider as you approach a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply
steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will
not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want the wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way
to find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-19
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make your vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you will be able to tell if the wheels are straight
and maneuver as you back down. It is best that you
back down the hill with the wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
There are also some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill:
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
There are some things you should do if the vehicle stalls,
or is about to stall, and you cannot make it up the hill:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it
from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
brake.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
4-20
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put the
transmission in PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if
it rolled downhill.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help the brakes and
they will not have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
There some things not to do when driving down a hill.
These are important because, if you ignore them,
you could lose control and have a serious accident:
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take
you across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” The
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-21
Your vehicle is much more likely to stall when going
uphill. But if it happens when going downhill:
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
4-22
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may
be too steep to drive across. When you go
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to
the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when you drive
across an incline, the much more narrow track
width — the distance between the left and
right wheels — may not prevent the vehicle from
tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an incline
puts more weight on the downhill wheels. This
could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it
can hit something that will trip it — a rock, a rut,
etc. — and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
When driving across an incline that is not too steep, the
vehicle can hit some loose gravel and start to slide
downhill. If you feel your vehicle starting to slide
sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out
the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk
the course” so you know what the surface is like
before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If
you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to
roll over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-23
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating,
and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
4-24
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles,
or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will not get
through. Also, water that deep can damage the axle
and other vehicle parts.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system and
your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get the tailpipe under water. And, as long as the tailpipe
is under water, you will never be able to start the
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when the brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing
water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-26 for
more information on driving through water.
4-25
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
•
•
•
•
•
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect
your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in
these types of driving conditions and avoid driving
through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing
water.
{CAUTION:
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-26
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-55.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date
maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
4-27
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-13 for information
about driving off-road.
4-28
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-55.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-29
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See
Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-30
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-31
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-32.
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
4-32
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-76.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. For vehicles with
StabiliTrak®, turn the traction control part of the system
off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that could
free your vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle
out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out.
Or, you can use recovery hooks, if your vehicle
has them. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-40.
Recovery Hooks
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
Your vehicle has recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle. You can use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
4-33
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-34
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker). The
tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 5-55 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-60.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-42 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
4-35
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
4-36
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The
label shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires
and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle.
4-37
This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
4-38
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components
that fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo
and installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to
get added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else – they go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
{CAUTION:
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
CAUTION:
unless you need to.
There’s also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
Driving on page 4-13.
(Continued)
4-39
Towing
Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing
All-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed with any of the
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-40.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
4-40
Level Control
Autoride®
Automatic Level Control
The Autoride® feature provides improved vehicle ride
and handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions.
The automatic level control rear suspension is available
on light-duty vehicles and comes as a part of the
Autoride® suspension, if equipped.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and
will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to
ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned off.
You may hear the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
Autoride® also interacts with the tow/haul mode that,
when activated, will provide additional control of
the shock absorbers. This additional control results in
better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle
is loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
under Towing a Trailer on page 4-42 for more
information.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
4-41
Towing a Trailer
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
Break-In on page 2-25 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
4-42
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires
Tow/Haul Mode
The Tow/Haul feature assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of
the Tow/Haul mode is to:
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing a
Trailer on page 4-42.
4-43
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in this section.
Tow/Haul is most useful under the following driving
conditions:
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
Press this button at the end of the shift lever to enable
tow/haul mode.
When the button is pressed, a light on the instrument
panel will illuminate to indicate that Tow/Haul has been
selected. Tow/Haul may be turned off by pressing
the button again, at which time the indicator light on the
instrument panel will turn off. The vehicle will
automatically turn off tow/haul every time it is started.
4-44
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when
the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Use the following chart to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model
and options.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
*GCWR
Yukon Denali
3.42
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
Yukon XL Denali
3.42
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-5
for more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle.
4-45
If you have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or
cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your
vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight
your vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-34 for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This
will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on
the rear axle.
After you have loaded the trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them
right by moving some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the
vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce
your trailering capacity more than the total of the
additional weight.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying hitch.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 to 15 percent
of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a maximum of
1,000 lbs (453 kg) with a weight distributing hitch.
4-46
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight
itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but
within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to
trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to
avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the
effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
4-47
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The
only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these
ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch.
Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Loading Your Vehicle for more information. Then
be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer
tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure
you don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distribution spring bars.
A. Body to Ground Distance
B. Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
4-48
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper could be
damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample room
when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and
the bumper.
To reinstall the hitch cover:
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer
will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
Hitch Cover
Your vehicle may have a hitch cover. To remove the
hitch cover:
1. Turn the fasteners on the lower tabs 90 degrees
counterclockwise.
2. Lift the lower edge of the cover about 45 degrees.
1. Hold the cover at a 45 degree angle to the vehicle
and push the upper tabs in the hitch cover into the
chrome slots in the fascia.
3. Pull the cover downward to disengage the upper
attachments.
2. Move the bottom of the cover forward until the
lower tabs line up with the lower fascia slots.
3. Snap the hitch cover into place by pushing the
upper corners forward.
4. Turn the fasteners on the lower tabs 90 degrees
clockwise to lock the cover in place.
4-49
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you can
turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
4-50
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-38. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-23.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
4-51
Making Turns
Driving On Grades
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-52
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
under Towing a Trailer on page 4-42.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant at higher altitudes
will boil at a lower temperature than at or near sea
level. If you turn your engine off immediately after towing
at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your vehicle
may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid
this, let the engine run while parked (preferably on
level ground) with the automatic transmission in
PARK (P) for a few minutes before turning the engine
off. If you do get the overheat warning, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-26.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-53
Trailer Wiring Harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector is attached to the rear
bumper beam. It is located next to the integrated
trailer hitch.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red w/ Black Stripe: Battery Feed*
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the
underhood electrical center, but the circuits are
not connected. They should be installed by your dealer
or a qualified service center.
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press
the tow/haul mode button located at the end of the
shift lever. This will boost the vehicle system voltage and
properly charge the battery. If the trailer is too light for
tow/haul mode, you can turn on the headlamps as
a second way to boost the vehicle system and charge
the battery.
4-54
Electric Brake Control Wiring
Provisions
These wiring provisions are included with your vehicle
as part of the heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
These provisions are for an electric brake controller.
The red/black stripe power feed will not be connected to
the battery until the ring terminal is unstowed and
connected to the underhood electrical center. The
instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the data
link connector for the trailer brake controller. The
harness contains the following wires:
•
•
•
•
Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector
Red/Black: Battery
Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
White: Ground
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of
the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include
the weight of the people inside, but you can figure about
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo load
must not be more than your vehicles CWR.
Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached, so that
you won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without
the spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 4-42.
It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified
service center.
4-55
✍ NOTES
4-56
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-17
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-20
Engine Coolant .............................................5-23
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26
Engine Overheating .......................................5-26
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-28
Cooling System ............................................5-29
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-34
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-34
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-35
Brakes ........................................................5-36
Battery ........................................................5-39
Jump Starting ...............................................5-40
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-45
Rear Axle .......................................................5-46
Front Axle ......................................................5-47
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-48
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-50
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-51
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-52
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-53
Tires ..............................................................5-55
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-56
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-60
High-Speed Operation ...................................5-62
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-62
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-64
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-67
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-69
Buying New Tires .........................................5-70
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-72
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-74
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-74
Tire Chains ..................................................5-76
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-77
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-78
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-79
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-85
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-90
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-94
Spare Tire ...................................................5-98
Appearance Care ............................................5-98
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-98
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-100
Leather ......................................................5-100
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces .................................................5-101
Wood Panels ..............................................5-101
Speaker Covers ..........................................5-101
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-101
5-2
Weatherstrips .............................................5-101
Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-102
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-102
Finish Care ................................................5-102
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .......5-103
Aluminum Wheels .......................................5-104
Tires .........................................................5-104
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-105
Finish Damage ...........................................5-105
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-105
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-105
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-106
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-107
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-107
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-107
Electrical System ..........................................5-108
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-108
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-108
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-108
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-108
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-109
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..............5-110
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-111
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-114
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-90.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-90.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
{CAUTION:
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise
and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511
in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 for
additional information.
Gasoline Octane
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced,
and you might notice a slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is less
than 87, you might notice a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could
damage the engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87
octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-42. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by your warranty.
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described
earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law in
some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-7
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly
burned. This spray can happen if your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss
noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge
inboard and release. The door will pop open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
Vehicle on page 5-102.
When replacing the fuel cap, insert the tether in its hole
before tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap clockwise
until it clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel
cap on the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is
fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-42
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed if the
fuel cap is not properly installed.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-42.
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is
in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite the fuel vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle to the lower left
of the steering wheel.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then bring the hood from full open
to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed
position, pause, then push the front center of the
hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate
the secondary hood release, near the center of
the grille.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 6.2L engine this is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.
B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.
C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 5-29 and Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap on page 5-26.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-40.
E. Battery. See Battery on page 5-39.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-20.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND) (Out of View).
See Jump Starting on page 5-40.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
J. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See Cooling
System on page 5-29.
K. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).
See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-34.
L. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-36.
M. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-111.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-13
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind
of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-114.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-14
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
5-15
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet
GM Standard GM6094M are all you need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-56. Change the oil as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over
a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service
5-16
people who will perform this work using genuine parts
and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message being turned on, reset the system.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine Oil
Life System:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the
DIC for more than five seconds. The oil life will
change to 100%.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine
air cleaner/filter and the air
filter restriction indicator,
if the vehicle has one.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
If your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator, it lets
you know when the engine air cleaner/filter needs to
be replaced. On vehicles with a restriction indicator, you
should inspect the air filter restriction indicator at every
oil change and replace the engine air cleaner/filter when
the indicator tells you to.
On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
5-17
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air
cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator turns black or
is in the red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and
reset the indicator. See the steps following to replace
the engine air cleaner/filter and to reset the air filter
restriction indicator.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
1. Locate the air
cleaner/filter assembly.
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12.
Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1
through 6. When you have the engine air cleaner/filter
removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt.
If the engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
5-18
2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing
and lift up the cover.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if the vehicle
has one, by pressing the top button on the indicator.
5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission
fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a
transmission leak or overheating the transmission. If you
suspect a small leak, then use the following checking
procedures to check the fluid level. However, if there is a
large leak, then it may be necessary to have the vehicle
towed to a dealer/retailer service department and have it
repaired before driving the vehicle further.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always use
the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the
Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Before checking the fluid level, prepare your vehicle as
follows:
1. Start the engine and park your vehicle on a level
surface. Keep the engine running.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in
PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, move the shift
lever back to PARK (P).
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at least
one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
5. Keep the engine running and press the Trip/Fuel
button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS
TEMP (Transmission Temperature) displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
5-20
6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and
perform the appropriate check procedure. If the
TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required
temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool,
or operate the vehicle until the appropriate
transmission fluid temperature is reached.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. Repeat the check procedure to
verify the reading.
Cold Check Procedure
Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if
the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely
until a hot check procedure can be made. The hot check
procedure is the most accurate method to check the fluid
level. Perform the hot check procedure at the first
opportunity. Use this cold check procedure to check fluid
level when the transmission temperature is between
80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C).
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the
engine compartment, on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
The dipstick handle has
this graphic. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band,
add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the
level into the COLD band. It does not take much
fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do not
overfill.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after
the transmission reaches a normal operating
temperature between 160°F to 200°F
(71°C to 93°C).
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-21
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level
when the transmission fluid temperature is between
160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. Repeat the check procedure to
verify the reading.
The hot check is the most accurate method to check the
fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the
first opportunity in order to verify the cold check.
The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so
it is important to ensure the transmission temperature is
within range.
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the
engine compartment, on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
The dipstick handle has
this graphic. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
5-22
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch
band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within
the HOT band, and the transmission temperature is
between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add
or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the
HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough
fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It does not
take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L).
Do not overfill.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using
the procedures described. Consistency
(repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper
fluid level. If fluid is added, it may take 15 minutes or
longer to obtain an accurate reading because of residual
fluid draining down the dipstick tube. If inconsistent
readings persist, check the transmission breather to be
sure it is clean and not clogged. If readings are still
inconsistent, contact your dealer/retailer.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-26.
5-23
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. Your
engine could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-24
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12 for more information.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD mark.
5-25
Adding Coolant
If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Engine Overheating
There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-41.
In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and a ENGINE
POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
5-26
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam or coolant before
you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-28 for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-28 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message,
along with a low coolant condition, can indicate a
serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-42.
5-27
If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If the vehicle has an air conditioner and it is on,
turn it off.
2. Turn on the heater to the highest temperature and
at the highest fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle immediately.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle has an
engine-driven cooling fan, push down the accelerator
until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal
idle speed for at least five minutes while parked.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle has an
electric cooling fan, idle the engine for five minutes
while parked.
5-28
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
You might decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this
mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface. Check the coolant
level after the system cools down. Some amount of
coolant may be lost due to overheating.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
5-29
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-28 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
5-30
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be
sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
5-31
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap by
slowly turning the pressure cap counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-32
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the
coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill
procedure Steps 1 through 6.
5-33
Engine Fan Noise
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Your vehicle has electric cooling fans. You might hear
the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday
driving. The fans can turn off if no cooling is required.
Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or
high outside temperatures, or if you are operating the
air conditioning system, the fans can change to high
speed and you might hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is
functioning properly. The fans change to low speed
when additional cooling is no longer required.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
5-34
What to Use
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a message that comes on when the
washer fluid is low. The message is displayed for
15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle. When the
CHECK WASHER FLUID message is displayed, you
will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer
fluid reservoir. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56 for more information.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-35
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, you
should have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not
work well.
5-36
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when
new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake
fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-39.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Checking Brake Fluid
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the
cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to see if
there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in
the brake hydraulic system can damage brake
hydraulic system parts so badly that they will
have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-102.
5-37
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-114.
{CAUTION:
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-38
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, the disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-40 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-39
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you
may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following
steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
5-40
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This
avoids sparks and helps save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
If the vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal, it is
located under a red plastic cover at the positive
battery post. To uncover the remote positive (+)
terminal, open the red plastic cover.
The remote negative (−) terminal is a stud located
on the right front of the engine, where the
negative battery cable attaches.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the remote
positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals.
5-41
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5-42
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the
dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal, on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-43
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover, if the
vehicle has one, to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-44
All-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
Transfer Case
If your vehicle is equipped with All-Wheel Drive, be sure
to perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
There are two additional systems that need lubrication.
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
(A) Drain Plug
(B) Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten
the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-45
Rear Axle
How to Check Lubricant
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain level.
When checking the fluid level on any axle, variations in
the readings can be caused by factory fill differences
between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume.
Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the
fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because fluid
has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained
back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading taken
five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear
to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been
stationary for an hour or two. Remember that the rear
axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
• For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles, the proper level is
from 0.6 inch to 1.6 inches (15 mm to 40 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on
the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the
proper level.
• For All-Wheel-Drive vehicles, the proper level is from
0.04 inch to 0.75 inch (1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below
the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the rear
axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
5-46
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
1500 Series
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-47
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset
at the factory and should need no further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim
of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs
to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to
be adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
The vehicle should:
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
• Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
5-48
• Have the tires properly inflated.
• Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the
vehicle.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-10
for more information.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low-beam headlamp.
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted
to be seen on the flat surface.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
E8 Torx® socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
5-49
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-52.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
5-50
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal/Taillamp
C. Back-up Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Remove the two
screws from the
taillamp assembly.
2. Remove the taillamp assembly.
3. Press the release tab, if equipped, and turn the
socket counterclockwise to remove it from the
taillamp assembly.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
5. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert the socket
into the taillamp assembly and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks.
6. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
5-51
License Plate Lamp
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
7441
License Plate Lamp
168
Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Taillamp,
and Stoplamp
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps to the molding that is part of the liftgate.
2. Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the molding opening.
5-52
Bulb Number
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. To replace the wiper
blade assembly:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-14.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the
blade, and turn the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
5-53
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park
rest position.
4. Replace the wiper blade.
5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest
position.
2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so care should be used
when pulling it away from the vehicle.
3. Turn the wiper blade assembly, and pull it off of the
wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in position and push
the blade away from the wiper arm.
5-54
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-34.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-60.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if
your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 5-62
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
20-Inch Tires
If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch
P275/55R20 size tires, they are classified as
touring tires and are designed for on road use.
The low-profile, wide tread design is not
recommended for off-road driving. See Off-Road
Driving on page 4-13, for additional information.
(Continued)
5-55
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustration is an example
of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-56
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
5-57
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60.
5-58
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date
of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-34.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-34.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
5-59
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 5-69.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-34.
5-60
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34. How you
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
tire. See Spare Tire on page 5-98 for additional
information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add
air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-61
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive
heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you or others could
be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road
conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated for
high speed operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure
for the vehicle load.
If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P275/55R20 size
tires and you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, set the cold inflation
pressure to 3 psi (20 kPa) above the recommended tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
Label. When you end this high-speed driving, return the
tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire
5-62
and Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-34 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-64, for
additional information.
5-63
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and
wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and
the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
5-64
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by
the driver. For additional information and details about
the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Displays (Using DIC Buttons) on page 3-49 or DIC
Operation and Displays (Using Trip Odometer
Reset Stem) on page 3-54 and DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-56.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-34, for an example of the Tire
and Loading Information label and its location on
your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 and Tires on page 5-55.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in
this section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-70.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
5-65
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions
the matching process stops and you need to start over.
5-66
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the
DIC screen.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire and wheel position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the
DIC display screen goes off.
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-69 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-69
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-74.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-67
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-114.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-34.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-64.
5-68
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-94.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-69
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as
the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-56
for additional information.
5-70
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect
the braking and handling performance of your vehicle.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-67 for
information on proper tire rotation.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle might not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types could also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
same size, brand, and type tires on all wheels.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Your vehicle may have a different size spare
than the road tires (those originally installed
on your vehicle). When new, your vehicle
included a spare tire and wheel assembly with
a similar overall diameter as your vehicle’s road
tires and wheels, so it is all right to drive on it.
Because this spare was developed for use on
your vehicle, it will not affect vehicle handling.
{CAUTION:
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are
the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-62.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-34, for more information about the
Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on
your vehicle.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
5-71
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will crash
and suffer serious injury. Only use GM specific
wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-70 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-72
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
5-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one
side or the other, the alignment might need to be
checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for
proper diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
5-74
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78 for more
information.
5-75
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured in
CAUTION:
5-76
(Continued)
(Continued)
a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-77
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION:
5-78
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need to change a flat tire is
stored under the storage tray, which is located on the
driver’s side trim panel (over the rear wheelhouse).
The following information tells you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
Regular Wheelbase shown, Extended Wheelbase
similar.
1. Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling up
on the finger depression under the jack symbol.
5-79
2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to retain the tool bag
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Turn the knob (A) on the jack counterclockwise to
release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket.
4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut (C)
counterclockwise.
5-80
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Jack Handle
D. Jack Handle
Extensions
E. Wheel Wrench
To access the spare tire:
H. Spare Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
I. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
J. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
K. Spare Tire Lock
1. To reach the hoist shaft access cover (C), you will
first need to remove the hitch cover. Remove it by
turning the two fasteners located at the bottom of
the cover counterclockwise and then pull the cover
down and rotate towards you.
2. Remove the hoist shaft access cover (C) on the
bumper to access the spare tire lock (K).
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Hoist Shaft Access
Cover/Hole
D. Jack Handle
Extensions
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Hoist Cable
G. Tire/Wheel Retainer
5-81
4. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and
wheel wrench (E) as shown.
3. To remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition
key, turn it clockwise and then pull straight back.
5-82
5. Insert the open end of
the extension (J)
through the hole in the
rear bumper (I) (hoist
shaft access hole).
Be sure the hoist end (J) of the extension (D)
connects to the hoist shaft (B). The ribbed
square end of the extension is used to lower the
spare tire.
6. Turn the wheel wrench (E) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire (H) to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to
lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 5-90
for more information.
7. Use the wheel wrench
hook that allows you to
pull the hoist cable
towards you, to assist
in reaching the
spare tire.
5-83
Once the retainer is separated from the guide pin,
tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of
the wheel along with the cable and latch.
8. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in
the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer (G).
Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding
the retainer up the pin while pressing down on
the latch.
5-84
9. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-78 for more information.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.
2. If the wheel has a center cap that covers the wheel
nuts, place the chiseled end of the wheel wrench in
the slot on the wheel and gently pry the cap out.
5-85
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
5-86
Front Position
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (B)
and only one jack handle extension (C). Attach
the wheel wrench (D) to the jack handle
extension (C). Attach the jack handle (B) to the
jack (A). Position the jack on the frame behind the
flat tire where the frame sections overlap (E).
Turn the wheel wrench (D) clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to
clear the ground.
Rear Position
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the
vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (B)
and both jack handle extensions (C). Attach
the wheel wrench (D) to the jack handle
extensions (C). Attach the jack handle (B) to the
jack (A). Use the jacking pad provided on the rear
axle. Turn the wheel wrench (D) clockwise to raise
the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to
clear the ground.
5-87
5. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
6. Take off the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become
loose after time. The wheel could come off and
cause an accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
CAUTION:
5-88
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
8. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the
spare tire.
9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel
is held against the hub.
10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-114 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-114 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
11. Tighten the nuts firmly
in a crisscross
sequence as shown
by turning the
wheel wrench
clockwise.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap, if your vehicle has one.
Line up the tabs on the back of the center cap with the
slot on the wheel. The cap only goes in one way.
Place the cap on the wheel and gently press until it
snaps into place.
5-89
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly
falling off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,
the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
on page 5-94.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
If the cable is not
visible proceed
to Step 6.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed next.
5-90
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by
turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you
hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
on page 5-79.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom edge
of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the
rear bumper.
5-91
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place.
The secondary latch has released and the spare tire
is balancing on the jack.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
5-92
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from under the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist end of extension, and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel
wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest
of the way.
14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull
it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
15. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-85.
5-93
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
5-94
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Hoist Shaft Access
Cover/Hole
D. Jack Handle
Extensions
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Hoist Cable
G. Tire/Wheel Retainer
H. Spare Tire/Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
J. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
K. Spare Tire Lock
1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to
the rear.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle. Separate the
tire/wheel retainer (G) from the guide pin. Pull
the pin through the center of the wheel. Tilt the
retainer down and through the center wheel opening.
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and
wheel wrench (E) as shown.
5-95
4. Insert the open end of
the extension (J)
through the hole in the
rear bumper (I) (hoist
shaft access hole).
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the cable.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover.
10. Reinstall the hitch cover.
5-96
3. Position the jack (E) and wheel blocks (A) in the
driver’s side trim panel over the wheelhouse.
To store the tools:
4. Turn the wing nut (G) clockwise until the jack is
secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be sure to
position the holes in the base of the jack onto the
pin in the mounting bracket.
5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to fasten the tool
bag (B) on the stud and turn the wing nut (D)
clockwise to secure.
A. Wheel Blocks
B. Tool Bag with Jack
Tools
C. Retaining Bracket
D. Wing Nut Retaining
Tool Bag
E. Jack
F. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
G. Wing Nut on Jack
1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle, and
jack handle extensions) to the tool bag (B).
2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and jack (E) together
with the wing nut (F).
Regular Wheelbase shown,
Extended Wheelbase similar.
6. Return the storage tray to its original stored position.
5-97
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-85 and Storing a Flat
or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-94.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your
vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be available in case
you need it again. Do not mix tires and wheels of different
sizes, because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and
its wheel together.
5-98
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening your
vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves
streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from the
use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-99
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-100
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because they
can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with just
water and mild soap.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-101
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use
it on your vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-106. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
5-102
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-102.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-106.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with
glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you
clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of
vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-103
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-104
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-105
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
5-106
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil, and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls and
raised white lettering.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-114 for your vehicle’s
engine code.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels
and the certificates of title and registration.
•
•
•
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-107
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-90.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
5-108
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. If the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool
down period, protecting the circuit until the problem
is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block access door is located
on the driver side edge of the instrument panel.
Fuses
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
Usage
Rear Seats
rear Accessory Power Outlet
Steering Wheel Controls Backlight
Driver Door Module
Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn Signal
Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Usage
Instrument Panel Back Lighting
Passenger Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
Passenger Door Module, Universal
Home Remote System
Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
Stoplamp
Rear Climate Controls
Not Used
Body Control Module (BCM)
Accessory Power Outlets
Interior Lamps
Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
Rear Seat Entertainment
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist, Power
Liftgate
Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Rear Wiper
Not Used
Driver Seat Module, Remote Keyless
Entry System
Not Used
5-109
Harness
Connector
LT DR
BODY
BODY
Usage
Driver Door Harness Connection
Harness Connector
Harness Connector
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The center instrument panel fuse block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
Top View
Harness
Connector
BODY 2
BODY 1
BODY 3
HEADLINER 3
HEADLINER 2
HEADLINER 1
Body Harness Connector 2
Body Harness Connector 1
Body Harness Connector 3
Headliner Harness Connector 3
Headliner Harness Connector 2
Headliner Harness Connector 1
Special
Option Upfitter
SEO/UPFITTER HarnessEquipment
Connector
Circuit Breaker
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
5-110
Usage
Usage
Passenger Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker
Driver Seat Circuit Breaker
Rear Sliding Window
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift the
cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
Fuses
1
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
2
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
3
4
5
Usage
Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Electronic Stability Suspension
Control, Automatic Level Control
Exhaust
Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Engine Controls
Engine Control Module, Throttle
Control
5-111
Fuses
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
5-112
Usage
Trailer Brake Controller
Front Washer
Oxygen Sensors
Antilock Brakes System 2
Trailer Back-up Lamps
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Engine Control Module (Battery)
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Right Side)
Transmission Control Module
(Battery)
Vehicle Back-up Lamps
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Air Conditioning Compressor
Oxygen Sensors
Transmission Controls (Ignition)
Fuel Pump
Fuel System Control Module
Headlamp Washers
Rear Windshield Washer
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Left Side)
Trailer Park Lamps
Fuses
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Usage
Driver Side Park Lamps
Passenger Side Park Lamps
Fog Lamps
Horn
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamps
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps 2
Sunroof
Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent
System
Windshield Wiper
SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Climate Controls (Battery)
Airbag System (Ignition)
Amplifier
Audio System
Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise
Control
Liftgate Release
Airbag System (Battery)
Instrument Panel Cluster
Fuses
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
J-Case Fuses
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Usage
Power Take-Off
Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition),
Compass-Temperature Mirror
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
Rear Defogger
Heated Mirrors
SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Relay, SEO Upfitter Usage
Climate Controls (Ignition)
Engine Control Module, Secondary
Fuel Pump (Ignition)
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Heavy Duty Antilock Brake System
Cooling Fan 2
Antilock Brake System 1
Starter
Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)
Left Bussed Electrical Center 1
J-Case Fuses
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
Relays
FAN HI
FAN LO
ENG EXH VLV
FAN CNTRL
HDLP LO/HID
FOG LAMP
A/C CMPRSR
STRTR
PWR/TRN
FUEL PMP
PRK LAMP
REAR DEFOG
RUN/CRANK
Usage
Electric Running Boards
Heated Windshield Washer System
Not Used
Stud 1 (Trailer Connector
Battery Power)
Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
Climate Control Blower
Power Liftgate Module
Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
Usage
Cooling Fan High Speed
Cooling Fan Low Speed
Not Used
Cooling Fan Control
Low-Beam Headlamps
Front Fog Lamps
Air Conditioning Compressor
Starter
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamps
Rear Defogger
Switched Power
5-113
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Regular
Extended
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
Transfer Case Fluid
Wheel Nut Torque
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
18.1 qt
17.1 L
6.0 qt†
5.7 L†
26.0 gal
31.5 gal
6.0 qt
1.5 qt
140 lbft
98.4 L
119.2 L
5.7 L
1.4 L
190 Y
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper
operating range.
Engine Specifications
5-114
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
6.2L V8
8
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15
Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
6-2
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the
time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work,
to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-34.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-13.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on within
10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission Control
Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. See footnote (k).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-67 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See Additional Required Services
on page 6-6.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transfer case fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-17.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
•
Change transfer case fluid.
See footnote (m).
•
•
•
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnotes † and (g).
•
•
•
6-6
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
Replace spark plugs and inspect
spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
•
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge
that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and
parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints
are maintenance-free.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.
6-7
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 5-53 and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades on page 5-103 for more information.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed
safety belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint
Systems on page 1-92.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
door hinges, liftgate hinge, liftgate linkage, liftgate handle
pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks, and
folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
6-8
(g) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(m) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-60. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-35.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-35.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-10
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
{CAUTION:
Hood and Liftgate Support Gas Strut
Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, corrosion,
cracks, loss of lubricant, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of gas strut. If necessary, replace
with genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Engine Oil
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
Engine Oil on page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
6-12
Usage
Windshield
Washer
Fluid/Lubricant
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Lubricant
Front and Rear Axle
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
Axle
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Transfer Case
DEXRON -VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,
in Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
Hood Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge
and Linkage,
Folding Seats,
and Fuel
Door Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Usage
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
6-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part
Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
15908916
A3086C
Oil Filter
89017524
PF48
Spark Plugs
12571164
41-985
15930910
—
Part
Wiper Blades
Front – 21.6 inches (55.0 cm)
6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-5
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Scheduling Service Appointments .....................7-8
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-9
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ....................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-14
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-14
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-15
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-16
OnStar® ......................................................7-17
Navigation System ........................................7-17
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-17
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., contact the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by
calling 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact General Motors
of Canada Customer Communication by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting GMC, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filling out a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts involved
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in approximately 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you can call the
General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-3
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
7-4
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe
to E-News and use tools and forms with
greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use the Text Telephones
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583
(462-8583). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Canada
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail GMC, the letter should be addressed to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States
All Overseas Locations
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.GMC.com
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583)
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
7-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S. call,
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782); (Text telephone
(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new GMC vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the GMC Roadside Assistance
program.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving the vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
Services Provided
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up to
a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle
to get to the nearest service station (approximately
$5 in Canada). In Canada, service to provide diesel
may be restricted. For safety reasons, propane and
other alternative fuels will not be provided through
this service.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your
vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if you
have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
•
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Roadside
Assistance will send you detailed, computer
personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either
the most direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along with
helpful travel information pertaining to your trip.
•
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. In Canada, trip routing requests will
be limited to six per calendar year.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: In the
event of a warranty related vehicle disablement,
while en route and over 150 miles (250 kilometres)
from original point of departure, you may qualify for
trip interruption expense assistance. This assistance
covers reasonable reimbursement of up to a
maximum of $500. In Canada, maximums include:
(A) meals (maximum of $50/day), (B) lodging
(maximum of $100/night) and (C) alternate ground
transportation (maximum of $40/day). This benefit is
to assist you with some of the unplanned expense
you may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be
repaired.
Original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair
order are required. In Canada, pre-authorization is
also required.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 (Canadian) upon submission
of the original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
7-7
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, when other services are utilized, our
Roadside Assistance Representatives will explain any
payment obligations you might incur.
GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner
or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
Calling For Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-8
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to make any changes or discontinue the
Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early
in the work day as possible to allow for the same
day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
Transportation Options
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty in
both the U.S. and Canada.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
7-9
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at
its sole discretion.
7-10
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine
GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and
safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can
help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-11
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do
not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of
mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are drivable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer/retailer, or General
Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Service Manuals
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782), or write:
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-14
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-15
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
7-16
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
See also OnStar® System on page 2-47 in this manual for
more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
7-17
✍ NOTES
7-18
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-90
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-108
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-29
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-17
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-23
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-35
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-34
Airbag System ................................................ 1-75
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-84
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-81
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-78
Airbag Systems
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-90
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-83
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-85
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-90
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-83
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-45
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ........................... 4-8
Antenna, Rear Side Window ........................... 3-119
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ... 3-119
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-40
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-104
Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-101
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-105
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-102
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-100
Finish Care ............................................... 5-102
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-105
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ............................................... 5-101
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-98
Leather .................................................... 5-100
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-105
Speaker Covers ......................................... 5-101
Tires ........................................................ 5-104
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-105
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-106
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-102
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-101
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-103
Wood Panels ............................................ 5-101
Appointments, Scheduling Service ....................... 7-8
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-22
Audio System ................................................. 3-73
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-117
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 3-105
Radio Reception ........................................ 3-118
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-115
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-74
1
Audio System (cont.)
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-116
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-119
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-76
Rear Side Window Antenna ......................... 3-119
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-18
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-20
Operation ................................................... 2-30
Autoride® ....................................................... 4-41
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-39
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-20
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-21
Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ................................... 1-9
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5
Brakes .......................................................... 5-36
System Warning Light .................................. 3-39
Braking ........................................................... 4-3
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-25
Bucket Seats, Rear ......................................... 1-16
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-50
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-48
License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-52
2
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-51
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-70
C
Calibration ..................................................... 2-40
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-114
Carbon Monoxide ........... 2-13, 2-15, 2-38, 4-29, 4-42
Care of
Safety Belts .............................................. 5-101
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-61
CD, MP3 ............................................... 3-94, 3-99
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-59
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-76
Charging System Light .................................... 3-37
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-42
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-105
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-56
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-52
Child Restraints (cont.)
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-60
Older Children ............................................. 1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position .................................................. 1-68
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-71
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-71
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-58
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-22
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-104
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-102
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-100
Finish Care ............................................... 5-102
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ............................................... 5-101
Interior ....................................................... 5-98
Leather .................................................... 5-100
Speaker Covers ......................................... 5-101
Tires ........................................................ 5-104
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-105
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-102
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-101
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-103
Wood Panels ............................................ 5-101
Cleaning (cont.)
Climate Control System
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-23
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-29
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System,
Electronic ................................................ 3-29
Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-74
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-10
Compass ....................................................... 2-40
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-22
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-60
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-41
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-29
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26
Cooling System .............................................. 5-29
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-13
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-47
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-58
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-9
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-5
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-5
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................... 7-13
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-14
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-17
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-11
Differential, Locking ........................................... 4-5
Disc, MP3 ............................................. 3-94, 3-99
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-20
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-19
Door
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Locks ........................................................ 2-10
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-49
DIC Operation and Displays .................. 3-49, 3-54
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-64
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
4
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-25
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-27
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-27
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-28
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-26
Off-Road .................................................... 4-13
Recovery Hooks .......................................... 4-33
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-32
Winter ........................................................ 4-29
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-23
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-105
E
EDR ............................................................. 7-15
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-108
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-110
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-108
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-109
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-108
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-111
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-108
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Drive Belt Routing .......................................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Fan Noise ..................................................
Oil .............................................................
Oil Life System ...........................................
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...........
Overheating ................................................
Running While Parked ..................................
Starting ......................................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
Event Data Recorders .....................................
Exit Lighting ...................................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
5-17
3-42
5-23
2-29
3-41
6-15
5-12
2-38
5-34
5-13
5-16
5-28
5-26
2-39
2-27
3-20
7-16
3-20
1-48
3-16
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-17
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-105
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-77
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-78
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-94
Fluid ............................................................. 5-20
Power Steering ........................................... 5-34
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-35
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-19
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-47
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-47
Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-20
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-48
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-48
Fuses
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-110
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-108
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-109
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-111
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-108
5
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-41
Fuel .......................................................... 3-48
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-45
Speedometer .............................................. 3-33
Tachometer ................................................. 3-33
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-38
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-50
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-58
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-8
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-48
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-50
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-17
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-16
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
6
Headlamps (cont.)
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-17
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heated Steering Wheel ..................................... 3-7
Heater ........................................................... 3-23
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-47
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-62
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-27
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-28
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-33
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-26
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-52
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-60
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Storage Area .............................................. 2-59
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-19
Cluster ....................................................... 3-32
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-40
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Dome ........................................................
Dome Lamp Override ...................................
Front Reading .............................................
Lap Belt ........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Level Control ..................................................
License Plate Lamps .......................................
5-56
3-19
3-20
3-20
1-47
1-41
1-60
4-41
5-52
Liftgate, Power ............................................... 2-15
Liftgate/Liftglass .............................................. 2-13
Liftglass/Liftgate .............................................. 2-13
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-34
Antilock Brake System Warning ..................... 3-40
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-39
Charging System ......................................... 3-37
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-47
Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-47
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-47
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-48
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-42
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-46
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-35
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-33
Security ..................................................... 3-46
StabiliTrak® Indicator .................................... 3-40
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-41
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-47
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-20
Exit ........................................................... 3-20
Lights
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-16
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-17
7
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-34
Locking Differential ........................................... 4-5
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
Locks
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Door .......................................................... 2-10
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door ................................................ 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-48
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-59
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
8
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-42
Manual, Using .................................................... iii
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ...................... 1-4
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-40
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 2-42
MP3 ..................................................... 3-94, 3-99
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-17
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ..................................................... 3-105
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-25
O
P
Odometer ...................................................... 3-33
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-33
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-13
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-45
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-46
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-16
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-49
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-17
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-47
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-51
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-29
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-21
Outside
Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................... 2-42
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-28
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-105
Park Aid ........................................................ 2-44
Park Brake .................................................... 2-35
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-36
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-37
Parking
Assist ........................................................ 2-44
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-38
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-35
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-85
Passing ......................................................... 4-11
PASS-Key® III+ .............................................. 2-23
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ................................ 2-24
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4
Power
Door Locks ................................................. 2-11
Electrical System ....................................... 5-108
Liftgate ...................................................... 2-15
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-27
Running Boards .......................................... 2-18
9
Power (cont.)
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-34
Windows .................................................... 2-20
Privacy .......................................................... 7-15
Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-16
Navigation System ....................................... 7-17
OnStar ....................................................... 7-17
Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-17
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-11
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-17
Radios .......................................................... 3-73
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-76
Radios
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 3-105
Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-115
Reception ................................................. 3-118
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-74
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-116
Rainsense™ II Wipers ..................................... 3-10
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
and Electronic Climate Controls ..................... 3-29
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-46
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Heated Seats ........................................... 1-9
10
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................. 3-115
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-105
Rear Side Window Antenna ............................ 3-119
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-60
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-12
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ...................................................... 2-40
Reclining Seatbacks, Power ............................... 1-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-33
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-40
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ..... 2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-8
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-85
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-79
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-52
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-14
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14
General Motors ........................................... 7-14
United States Government ............................ 7-13
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-92
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-93
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-27
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-32
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-15
Running Boards, Power ................................... 2-18
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-39
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-33
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 5-101
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-33
Lap Belt ..................................................... 1-47
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-41
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-48
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-47
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-28
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
60/40 Split Bench Seat .................................. 1-9
Bucket Seats, Rear ...................................... 1-16
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-8
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Heated Seats - Rear ..................................... 1-9
Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ........................... 1-4
Seats (cont.)
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Reclining Seatbacks ............................. 1-6
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Third Row Seat ........................................... 1-23
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-90
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-71
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-68
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-71
Security Light ................................................. 3-46
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
California Pershlorate Materials Requirements ... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-42
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-14
Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-8
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-90
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-105
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-36
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-37
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-98
Installing .................................................... 5-85
Removing ................................................... 5-79
11
Spare Tire (cont.)
Storing ....................................................... 5-94
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-114
Speedometer .................................................. 3-33
Split Bench Seat (60/40) .................................... 1-9
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-6
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ................................ 3-40
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-8
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-27
Steering .......................................................... 4-8
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-117
Steering Wheel, Heated ..................................... 3-7
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-59
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-60
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-58
Glove Box .................................................. 2-58
Instrument Panel Storage Area ...................... 2-59
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-59
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-60
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-32
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-21
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-62
12
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-33
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-51
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-116
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-21
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-22
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-23
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 2-24
Third Row Seat .............................................. 1-23
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-74
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-41
Tires ............................................................. 5-55
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ........................ 5-104
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-70
Chains ....................................................... 5-76
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-78
Cleaning ................................................... 5-104
Different Size .............................................. 5-72
High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-62
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-77
Tires (cont.)
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-60
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-67
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-85
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-64
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-62
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-85
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-79
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-90
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-98
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-94
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-56
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-74
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-74
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-69
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-34
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-47
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-40
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-42
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-40
Traction
Locking Differential ........................................ 4-5
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-6
Trailer
Recommendations ....................................... 4-55
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-20
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-30
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-33
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-8
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 2-44
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-72
Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-50
Operation ................................................... 2-51
Using this Manual ............................................... iii
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-3
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-34
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-64
13
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-15
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-107
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-107
Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-8
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-29
Visors ........................................................... 2-21
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-38
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-31
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-74
Different Size .............................................. 5-72
Replacement ............................................... 5-74
14
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-58
Windows ....................................................... 2-19
Power ........................................................ 2-20
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ........ 5-103
Rainsense™ II Wipers .................................. 3-10
Washer ...................................................... 3-11
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-35
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-53
Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-108
Wipers ....................................................... 3-10
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-12
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-29
X
XM Radio Messages ..................................... 3-104
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-119
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
">